Catálogo de Fichas Técnicas

Planta de Tratamiento de Efluentes Industriales, CARP

Hermosillo

CLIENTE: GEN Industrial

LOCALIZACION: Hermosillo, Sonora

 EQUIPOS DE PROCESO

• Filtro Bolsa
• Filtro de Carbón Activado
• Lámpara UV
• Generador de Ozono
• Concentrador de Oxígeno
BF Series
Single Bag Housings: #1, #2, #3 and #4 sizes

• Designed for industrial and commercial filter applications

• Heavy duty construction for maximum durability
• 1/8" perforated stainless steel basket (optional perforations
and mesh sizes available)
• #1 and # 2 Size Housings:
--Available in 316L Stainless Steel, 304L Stainless Steel or
Carbon Steel construction for a wide range of chemical
compatibility
--Clamp or Swing Bolt closures
--Stainless steel compression spring provides positive bag
sealing
--Adjustable stainless steel leg assembly
--1/4" FNPT gauge ports and 1/2" FNPT drain port
• #3 and #4 Size Housings:
--316 Stainless Steel construction
--Clamp closure for easy bag change outs
--Optional compression spring and adjustable mounting legs

Applications
Water Chemicals
Food & Beverage Electronics
Oil Inks / Paints / Coatings
Coolants Pulp & Paper

Specifications & Operating Parameters

Maximum Operating Pressure Baskets

150 psig (10.3 bar) @ 300°F (149°C) 1/8" perforated stainless steel
Options: various perforation and mesh sizes
Connections
Inlet /Outlet: Materials of Construction
Head / Shell:
2" FNPT (#1 and #2 Sizes)
#1 and #2 Sizes
3/4", 1" and 1 1/2" FNPT (#3 and #4 Sizes)
316L Stainless Steel, 304L Stainless Steel, Carbon Steel
Optional: RF Flanges or Sanitary Ferrules
#3 and #4 Sizes
316L Stainless Steel
Drain Port: 1/2" FNPT (#1 and #2 Sizes)
Gauge Ports: 1/4" FNPT - clean and dirty sides (#1 and #2 sizes) Eye Nuts: Zinc plated steel
Vent Port: 1/4" NPT Plug Mounting Legs: 304L Stainless Steel

Gaskets Options
Buna N - Side Inlet / Side Outlet (#1 and #2 sizes)
Optional: EPR, Silicone, Teflon Encapsulated Silicone, Viton - 134 epoxy coating for seawater and corrosive applications
See ordering guide for complete selection of options

www.shelco.com
 MODEL CLOSURE MAX FLOW RATE* DRAIN DIMENSIONS
AND GPM (LPM) SIZE
BAG SIZE
A B C D E F
BFS-1 / BFC-1 Clamp or 70 (265) 1/2" 18 7/8" (47.9 cm) 20 1/2" (52.1 cm) 21 3/4" (55.2 cm) 3" (7.6 cm) 6 11/16" (17.0 cm) 3" (7.6 cm)
Swing Bolt
BFS-2 / BFC-2 Clamp or 150 (567) 1/2" 34 7/8" (88.6 cm) 22 3/4" (92.7 cm) 21 3/4" (55.2 cm) 3" (7.6 cm) 6 11/16" (17.0 cm) 3" (7.6 cm)
Swing Bolt
BFS-3 Clamp 25 (95) 16 9/16" (42.1 cm) 10 3/8" (26.4 cm)

BFS-4 Clamp 40 (151) 22 7/8" (58.1 cm) 16 11/16" (42.4 cm)

*Flow rates are guidelines only. Actual flow rates are based upon fluid, viscosity, bag type, micron ratings and other factors

Dimensions
ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING LEGS F
W/ 9/16" MOUNTING HOLE
ON AN APPROXIMATE 11 1/2" B.C.
D E
3" 3"
F
6" 6"

A B A B #1 & #2 SIZE BASKET

A
A B
ADJUSTABLE

C
MOUNTING LEGS
B
C
W/5/16" MOUNTING
BOLT ON A 6 1/4"
BOLT CIRCLE.

#3 SIZE BASKET #4 SIZE BASKET

#3 & #4 SIZE BASKET

Ordering Guide (Example:BFS-2SB-2-316-B

MODEL DIM. A DIM. B ) MODEL DIM. A DIM. B
#1 SIZE 18 7/8” 20 1/2” #3 SIZE 16 9/16” 10 3/8”
#2 SIZE 34 7/8” 36 1/2” #4 SIZE 22 7/8” 16 11/16”
BFS - 2 SB - 2 - 316 - B
MODEL BAG CLOSURE PIPE SIZE MATERIAL CONNECTION GASKET
SIZE ORIENTATION

#1 and #2 Sizes
BFS = Stainless 1 C = Clamp 2 = 2" FNPT (standard) 304 = 304 SS Blank = Side In / Bottom Out B = Buna N (Standard)
Steel 2 SB = Swing Bolt 2F = 2" RF Flange 316 = 316 SS 2= Side In / Side Out E = EPR
BFC = Carbon 3 = 3" FNPT 134 = 134 Coating over 304 SS* S = Silicone
Steel 3F = 3" RF Flange V = Viton
2TC = 2" Sanitary Ferrules

#3 and #4 Sizes
BFS = Stainless 3 C = Clamp 75 = 3/4" FNPT 316 = 316 SS Blank = Side In / Bottom Out B = Buna N (Standard)
Steel 4 1 = 1" RF Flange 2= Side In / Side Out E = EPR
1.5 = 1 1/2" FNPT (Hold Down Spring S = Silicone
(standard) Recommended) V = Viton

* Note: 134 Coating must have swing bolt closure and flanged connections.

Customization
Housings may be customized to meet your precise requirements. Contact Shelco’s technical support staff or your distributor for
more information.

Shelco Filters
100 Bradley Street
Middletown, CT 06457 USA
Tel: 800-543-5843 / Fax: 860-854-6120 / E-mail: [email protected]
MicroSentry™, MicroVantage™, Shelco Filters® and the Shelco logo are registered trademarks of the Tinny Corporation. Shelco Filters is a division of the Tinny Corporation.

Bulletin: BF.12.01 © Shelco Filters 2012 Manufacturer reserves the right to make changes without notice.
 The Advantage Water Quality
Water quality plays a major role in the
transmission of germicidal ultraviolet rays. It is Eliminating
recommended that the water does not exceed microorganisms
the following maximum concentration levels. in your water *

UV-SEAL SAFE UV-WASHER CLP-35UV UV-NUT-1

Maximum Concentration Levels UV-NUT-2 UV-PLUG
Seal for Sleeve and Nut Washer for Sleeve and Nut Aluminum chamber Aluminum Long Nut Aluminum Short Nut Plastic Plug for Nuts
for Models for Models clip kit 3.5” for Wire Connection with End Plug for Models
UVA-1C – UVA-200B
• No need to handle toxic or corrosive
UVA-1C – UVA-200B
chemicals
for Models UVA-418/630/946HO Iron for Models UVA-1C – < 0.3 ppm
UVA-200B (0.3 mg/L)
for Models UVA-6C – UVA-200B UVA-6C – UVA-200B

or by-products Hardness < 7 ppm (120 mg/L)

• Microbiologically free water without the use of Turbidity < 1 NTU
potentially dangerous chemicals Bacillus
Manganese < 0.05 ppm (0.05 mg/L)
• UV imparts no change in taste, odor, pH or conductivity
Tannins < 0.1 ppm (0.1 mg/L)
• No trihalomethanes (THM’s) formation
UV Transmittance > 75%

Effectively treating water with higher concentration levels than listed

SIMPLE above can be accomplished, but may require added measures to
improve water quality to treatable levels.

• Fast and simple installation with three connections

(two water and one electrical). Cyanobacteria
UV Dose
• ZEB-55155 HOB-4890
Maintenance involves annual lamp replacement BEB-1024 BEB-2439 ZEB-
se wires Ballast for Ballast for The units generate a UVBallast dosage
for of at least 30,000 Ballast for Ballast no cup
/220V (provided
87W 110V/220V water quality parameters are met)
48W-90W 110V/220V 10W-17W 110V/220V 24W-39W 110V/220V for 24W-39W
for Models with
microwatt-seconds per square centimeter
VA-100B no
UVA-150B need to turn off water
– UVA-200B for Modelsflow.
UVA-418/630/946HO for Models UVA-1C – UVA-4C for Models UVA-6C – UVA-12C for Models UVA-
(µW-s/cm2), even at the end-of-lamp life (EOL),
• Automatic, unattended and user friendly operation. which is more than sufficient to destroy most
waterborne microorganisms, such as bacteria,
yeasts, algae, etc.
EFFICIENT
Polio
• Compact units with 304 or 316 (upon request) stainless Polaris Scientific UV™ Sterilization Systems
steel reactor chamber, polished for laboratory and medical utilize a natural quartz sleeve to protect the
use, require minimum space. lamp and allow the maximum amount of UV
rays to penetrate and disinfect the water.
• Microorganisms are inactivated within seconds; eliminates
the need for long retention times or retention tanks.
NG UV-TIMER Polaris Scientific UV™ Sterilization
UV-32SPRINGSystems UV-39
pring • Very low power consumption;
Counter/Timer less than 40-watt bulb to germicidal lamps are specially
Stainlessdesigned
Steel Spring UV Stainless S
effectively treat fromUVA-24B
for Models 1 to –100 gallons per minute.
UVA-200B for Model
radiation lamps which produce UVA-8C
a rated wave
for M
00B Cryptosporidium UVA-12C
• High output low pressure mercury vapor lamps with high length of 254nm.
isolation pin.
• Little changeUnited States
in water Patent: D751506,
temperature even after prolonged Polaris Scientific UV™ Sterilization Systems
periods of noTaiwan Patent: M 503904,
water flow. are your best choice in UV sterilization. With its
China Patent: ZL 2015 2 0160464.9, durable construction, high quality quartz sleeve
• Mexico
Open end high Patent:
quality 49882
quartz sleeve and stainless steel and performance lamps, you can’t go wrong.
gland units. Polaris Scientific UV and the Polaris Scientific UV logo design
are registered Trademarks in the United States and certain
other countries.
E. Coli
The Polaris Scientific UV Germicidal Lamp Pin Design is QS10
ECONOMICAL
patented under United States Patent Number: D751506, FEATURES Quartz Sleeve, 245mm
Taiwan Patent Number: M 503904, China Patent Number: for 10W UV Lamp
ZL 2015 2 0160464.9, Mexico Patent Number: 49882, and is for Model UVA-1C
• No moving parts tobywear
protected outandorInternational
U.S. Patent break. Trademark laws. 3 Audible ballast with LED lamp
out indicator.
• Lower
GL14PP capital investment when compared to chlorine
GL24PP QS14 GL1
mm, Germicidal Lamp
d Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
or14W,
ozone systems.
287mm, Germicidal Lamp 24W, 436mm, Germicidal Lamp
Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
3 High output low pressure mercury vapor Quartz Sleeve, 331mm
for 14W UV Lamp
10W
Sing
VA-1C for Model UVA-2C for Model UVA-6C lamps with high isolation pin design. for Model UVA-2C for M

3 Open end quartz sleeve and stainless Shigella

GL39PP GL87PP steel gland units.
QS24 QS32 QS39 GL
mm, Germicidal Lamp 39W, 843mm, Germicidal Lamp 87W, 843mm, Germicidal Lamp Quartz Sleeve, 535mm
Quartz Sleeve, 665mm Quartz Sleeve, 890mm 32W
* 39W
TheseUV
microorganisms may/may
d Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
VA-8C
Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
for Models UVA-12C - UVA-100B
Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
for Models UVA-150B - UVA-200B
3 for 24W UV Lamp
for Model UVA-6C
for 32W UV Lamp
Operating temperature and
for Model UVA-8C
for
for Models
Lamp
not exist in your
UVA-12C household water.
– UVA-200B
Sing
for M
sealing efficiency. It is important that you have
your water tested to identify
microorganisms and/or
8PP GLHO58PP GLHO90PP 3 Limited
QS48HO 5-year warrantyQS58HO
on stainless QS90HO
contaminants, if any. GL
mm, Germicidal Lamp 58W, 645mm, Germicidal Lamp 90W, 846mm, Germicidal Lamp Quartz Sleeve, 535mm Quartz Sleeve, 665mm Quartz Sleeve, 890mm
steel housing.
for 48W UV Lamp for 58W UV Lamp for 90W UV Lamp
48W
d Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Sing
VA-418HO for Model UVA-630HO for Model UVA-946HO for Model UVA-418HO for Model UVA-630HO for Model UVA-946HO for M
3 Limited 1-year warranty on electronics.

Polaris Scientif ic Sterilization

Ultraviolet UV ™ Accessories
Simplified Residential and Commercial UV Sterilization
Polaris Scientific Ultraviolet Systems have a sleek, compact design and provide cost effective ultraviolet
water sterilization for low to medium flow applications. Polaris Scientific UV’s are perfect for residential
and light commercial reverse osmosis systems, water vending machines, food industry, laboratory, final
electronic component rinsing and recirculation loops to name a few.

Polaris Scientific Ultraviolet Systems produce little change in water temperature even after prolonged
periods of no water flow, making them ideal for many application requirements.

Ultraviolet Sterilization Simplified

 Commercial Ultraviolet Sterilization Systems
POLARIS SCIENTIFIC UVA-50B

200

UV
190

UV
UV dose of

A-
PA R T S & A C C E S S O R I E S

A-1
180

20
30 mJ/cm2

B 0
0B
170
160
UV dose of
Electronic Ballast Quartz Sleeve Lamp

Note: Dosages based on 95% UVT at end of lamp life (EOL)

150

UV
140
Cryptosporidium 40 mJ/cm2

A-1
& Giardia Lamblia

00
130

B
ZEB-2439 QS39 GL39PP 120 eradicated at

UV
110 <10 mJ/cm2

A-
80
B
100

Note: 1 mJ/cm2 = 1,000 µ2Wsec/cm2

UV
90 60

A-
Additional Accessories Specific to Your UV System
UVA-50B 80 E. coli UV B
A-
70 eradicated 50
B
60 at 6.6 mJ/cm2 UV
UV-NUT-1 / A-
UV-39SPRING UV-SEAL 50 36
B
UV-NUT-2 40 UV
A-2
4B
30
20
UV-WASHER UV-PLUG UV-TIMER 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Manufacturer’s NSF/EPA
Standard Standard

Rated Life Voltage @ Visual Audible Number of Port Size Water Maximum Working
GPM Lamp Watts Timer Length Width Wavelength Microjoules
(hours) 50/60HZ Warning Warning Lamps Inlet/Outlet Chamber Pressure Temp.

INDICATOR STAINLESS
50 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED
W/ALARM
4 1.5”
304  36.93” 5.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF 254 nm 30 mJ/cm2

NOTE: Flanges available upon request.

POLARIS SCIENTIFIC UVA-60B

200

UV
190

UV
UV dose of

A-
PA R T S & A C C E S S O R I E S

A-1
180

20
30 mJ/cm2

50

B 0
170

B
160
UV dose of
Electronic Ballast Quartz Sleeve Lamp

Note: Dosages based on 95% UVT at end of lamp life (EOL)

150

UV
140
Cryptosporidium 40 mJ/cm2

A-1
& Giardia Lamblia

00
130

B
ZEB-2439 QS39 GL39PP 120 eradicated at

UV
110 <10 mJ/cm2

A-
80
B
100

Note: 1 mJ/cm2 = 1,000 µ2Wsec/cm2

UV
90 60

A-
UVA-60B 80 E. coli UV B
Additional Accessories Specific to Your UV System eradicated A-
50
70 B
60 at 6.6 mJ/cm2 UV
UV-NUT-1 / A-
36
UV-39SPRING UV-SEAL 50 B
UV-NUT-2 40 UV
A-2
4B
30
20
UV-WASHER UV-PLUG UV-TIMER 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Manufacturer’s NSF/EPA
Standard Standard

Rated Life Voltage @ Visual Audible Number of Port Size Water Maximum Working
GPM Lamp Watts Timer Length Width Wavelength Microjoules
(hours) 50/60HZ Warning Warning Lamps Inlet/Outlet Chamber Pressure Temp.

INDICATOR 2” or 2.5” STAINLESS

60 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED
W/ ALARM
5 FLANGE 304  36.93” 5.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF 254 nm 30 mJ/cm2

U VA - 5 0 B / U VA - 6 0 B
 UV-NUT-1 UV-NUT-2 UV-PLUG UV-SEAL UV-WASHER CLP-35UV
Aluminum Long Nut Aluminum Short Nut Plastic Plug for Nuts Seal for Sleeve and Nut Washer for Sleeve and Nut Aluminum chamber
for Wire Connection with End Plug for Models for Models for Models clip kit 3.5”
for Models UVA-1C – UVA-200B for Models UVA-6C – UVA-200B UVA-6C – UVA-200B UVA-1C – UVA-200B UVA-1C – UVA-200B for Models UVA-418/630/946HO

BEB-1024 BEB-2439 ZEB-2439 ZEB-55155 HOB-4890

Ballast for Ballast for Ballast no cup expose wires Ballast for Ballast for
10W-17W 110V/220V 24W-39W 110V/220V for 24W-39W 110V/220V 87W 110V/220V 48W-90W 110V/220V
for Models UVA-1C – UVA-4C for Models UVA-6C – UVA-12C for Models UVA-24B – UVA-100B for Models UVA-150B – UVA-200B for Models UVA-418/630/946HO

UV-32SPRING UV-39SPRING UV-TIMER

Stainless Steel Spring Stainless Steel Spring Counter/Timer
for Model for Models for Models UVA-24B – UVA-200B
UVA-8C UVA-12C – UVA-200B

United States Patent: D751506,

Taiwan Patent: M 503904,
China Patent: ZL 2015 2 0160464.9,
Mexico Patent: 49882
Polaris Scientific UV and the Polaris Scientific UV logo design
are registered Trademarks in the United States and certain
other countries.
QS10 The Polaris Scientific UV Germicidal Lamp Pin Design is
Quartz Sleeve, 245mm patented under United States Patent Number: D751506,
for 10W UV Lamp Taiwan Patent Number: M 503904, China Patent Number:
for Model UVA-1C ZL 2015 2 0160464.9, Mexico Patent Number: 49882, and is
protected by U.S. Patent and International Trademark laws.

QS14 GL10PP GL14PP GL24PP

Quartz Sleeve, 331mm 10W, 212mm, Germicidal Lamp 14W, 287mm, Germicidal Lamp 24W, 436mm, Germicidal Lamp
for 14W UV Lamp Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
for Model UVA-2C for Models UVA-1C for Model UVA-2C for Model UVA-6C

QS24 QS32 QS39 GL32PP GL39PP GL87PP

Quartz Sleeve, 535mm Quartz Sleeve, 665mm Quartz Sleeve, 890mm 32W, 645mm, Germicidal Lamp 39W, 843mm, Germicidal Lamp 87W, 843mm, Germicidal Lamp
for 24W UV Lamp for 32W UV Lamp for 39W UV Lamp Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
for Model UVA-6C for Model UVA-8C for Models UVA-12C – UVA-200B for Model UVA-8C for Models UVA-12C - UVA-100B for Models UVA-150B - UVA-200B

QS48HO QS58HO QS90HO GLHO48PP GLHO58PP GLHO90PP

Quartz Sleeve, 535mm Quartz Sleeve, 665mm Quartz Sleeve, 890mm 48W, 436mm, Germicidal Lamp 58W, 645mm, Germicidal Lamp 90W, 846mm, Germicidal Lamp
for 48W UV Lamp for 58W UV Lamp for 90W UV Lamp Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm Single End Patented 4 Pin, 254nm
for Model UVA-418HO for Model UVA-630HO for Model UVA-946HO for Model UVA-418HO for Model UVA-630HO for Model UVA-946HO

Polaris Scientif ic UV ™ Accessories

 Product Warranty

RoH
oHSS
COMPL
PLIIAN
ANTT

5-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY “General Conditions and Limitations” below. products listed in the “Specific Warranty Coverage” section. These
FOR POLARIS ULTRAVIOLET UV CHAMBER ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LAMPS, SLEEVES AND UV SENSORS limited warranties outline the exclusive remedy for all claims
POLARIS Ultraviolet warrants original lamps, sleeves and UV sensors whether based on contract, tort (including negligence), strict
POLARIS Ultraviolet warrants the UV chamber on the POLARIS to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period liability or otherwise. Disclaimer of warranties. Except as expressly
Ultraviolet product to be free from defects in material and of one (1) year from the date of purchase. During this time, we will warranted in writing by POLARIS Ultraviolet, the goods sold by
workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of purchase. repair or replace, at its option, any defective parts covered by the POLARIS Ultraviolet are purchased by the buyer “as is.” POLARIS
During this time, we will repair or replace, at its option, any defective warranty. The warranty period for lamps and sleeves may be verified Ultraviolet does not warrant that the goods are of merchantable
POLARIS Ultraviolet chamber. Please return the defective part to the using date codes in addition to purchase receipts and POLARIS quality or that they can be used for any particular purpose. Except
POLARIS Ultraviolet dealer you purchased your system from, who will Ultraviolet’s database of serial number sales date. We will advise as expressly warranted in writing by POLARIS Ultraviolet,POLARIS
return it to POLARIS Ultraviolet. We will either make the necessary you whether the defective item needs to be returned to the POLARIS Ultraviolet makes no representation or warranty of any kind with
repairs or, if it is determined that a replacement is required, we Ultraviolet dealer you purchased the equipment from for failure respect to the products.
will provide a replacement part. We will then return the part to the analysis. Replacement lamps and sleeves provided under warranty
dealer. This warranty does not include shipping and handling charges will be sent to your POLARIS Ultraviolet dealer. If the UV sensor Limitation of liability. In no event shall POLARIS Ultraviolet be liable
which will be collected from you by the dealer. Parts repaired or experiences a problem which POLARIS Ultraviolet confirms is covered to the purchaser or any other entity for more than the invoice price
replaced under this five (5) year warranty will be covered under by warranty, please return the sensor to a POLARIS Ultraviolet dealer received by POLARIS Ultraviolet for any non-conforming products.
warranty to the end of the original five (5) year warranty period. This you purchased the equipment from who will return it to us. We POLARIS Ultraviolet shall not be liable to the purchaser or any
warranty is also subject to the conditions and limitations outlined will either repair or replace the sensor and return the sensor to other entity for personal injury, property damage, or any direct,
under the heading “General Conditions and Limitations” below. your dealer. This warranty on lamps, sleeves and sensors does not indirect, special, incidental, consequential, punitive, exemplary, or
include shipping and handling charges which will be collected from other damages of any kind, including without limitation the cost of
ONE-YEAR LIMITED PRO-RATED WARRANTY you by the dealer. Parts replaced under this one (1) year warranty procurement of substitute goods, the loss of profits, products, or
FOR STRUCTURAL, HARDWARE AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS will be covered under warranty to the end of the original one (1) production, or the interruption of business, however caused and
year warranty period. This warranty is also subject to the conditions on any theory of liability, and whether or not POLARIS Ultraviolet
POLARIS Ultraviolet warrants the structural, hardware, and electrical and limitations outlined under the heading “General Conditions and has been advised of the possibility of such damages. The essential
components to be free from defects in material and workmanship for Limitations” below. purpose of this provision is to limit the liability of POLARIS
a period of one (1) year pro-rated from the date of purchase. During Ultraviolet arising out of the sale of products to the purchaser
this time, we will repair or replace, at its option, any defective parts GENERAL CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS whether for breach of contract, negligence, or otherwise. These
covered by the warranty. Defective part(s) should be returned to a limitations shall apply notwithstanding any failure of essential
POLARIS Ultraviolet dealer, who will return it to POLARIS Ultraviolet. None of the above warranties cover damage caused by improper purpose of any limited remedy and notwithstanding the provisions
We will either make the necessary repairs or, if it is determined use or maintenance, accidents, acts of God or minor scratches or of any other agreement between POLARIS Ultraviolet and the
that a replacement is required, we will provide a replacement part. imperfections that do not materially impair the operation of the purchaser.
We will then return the part to the dealer. This warranty does not product. The warranties also do not cover products that are not
include shipping and handling charges which will be collected from installed as outlined in the applicable Owner’s Manual. POLARIS
you by the dealer. Parts repaired or replaced under this one (1) year Ultraviolet System warranty will be deemed null and void if any of
pro-rated warranty will be covered under warranty to the end of the the product labels are removed, including the pressure sensitive For complete Terms & Conditions see reverse side
original one (1) year pro-rated warranty period. This warranty is also hologram serial number. The limited warranties described above
subject to the conditions and limitations outlined under the heading are the only warranties applicable to the POLARIS Ultraviolet

Warran t y / Terms & Condi tions

 General Conditions and Limitations

The products described in this document are hereby offered for sale to be established by Hydrofit Quick Connect Fittings, Polaris Scientific imposed by any taxing authority, the Buyer shall promptly indemnify and hold the Seller harmless from and against any such tax, as well as
Ultraviolet, Hydron Membranes, Aquatrol, Shok Blok, HydroGuard, Hydronix Water Technology, any of its subsidiaries and its authorized any interest or penalties thereon which may be assessed if the items are held to be taxable.
distributors. This offer and its acceptance by any customer (the "Buyer") shall be governed by all of the following Terms and Conditions. Buyer’s 14. Warranty.
order for any item described in this document, when communicated to Hydrofit Quick Connect Fittings, Polaris Scientific Ultraviolet, Hydron EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY WARRANTED IN WRITING BY THE SELLER, THE GOODS SOLD BY THE SELLER ARE PURCHASED BY THE BUYER “AS IS.” THE
Membranes, Aquatrol, Shok Blok, HydroGuard, Hydronix Water Technology, its subsidiaries or an authorized distributor (the "Seller") verbally SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE GOODS ARE OF MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR THAT THEY CAN BE USED FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
or in writing, shall constitute acceptance of this offer. Provided, however, that these terms and conditions shall not operate as a rejection of the EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY WARRANTED IN WRITING BY THE SELLER, THE SELLER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH
Buyer’s offer unless such offer contains variances in the description, quantity, price, or delivery schedule of the items. RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS.
1. Terms and Conditions of Sale. (a) The Seller warrants that the items sold hereunder shall be free from defects in material or workmanship at the time of shipment by the
All descriptions, quotations, proposals, offers, acknowledgments, acceptances and sales of the Seller’s products are subject to and shall be Seller. The Seller warrants that if within 12 months of delivery of the goods to the Buyer the Buyer returns immediately to the Seller’s premises
governed exclusively by the terms and conditions stated herein (the "Agreement"). The Buyer’s acceptance of any offer to sell is limited to the any of the said goods which the Buyer believes to be defective, carrier paid, properly packed and clearly marked with the Buyer’s full name
terms and conditions in the Agreement. Any terms or conditions in addition to or inconsistent with those stated in the Agreement, proposed and address and any other information such as serial numbers which may be necessary to enable the goods to be identified, together with
by the Buyer in any acceptance of an offer by the Seller, are hereby rejected. No such additional, different or inconsistent terms and conditions a complete description of the alleged defect, they will be repaired or new goods will be supplied in exchange and the goods so repaired or
shall become part of the agreement between the Buyer and the Seller unless expressly accepted in writing by the Seller. The Seller’s acceptance such new goods will be delivered to the Buyer free of charge at the Seller’s premises; provided, however, that the foregoing warranty shall
of any offer to purchase by the Buyer is expressly conditioned upon the Buyer’s assent to all the terms and conditions in this Agreement, be applicable only if upon demand by the Seller, the Buyer proves to the Seller’s satisfaction: (i) that the defect was due solely to defective
irrespective of any terms in addition to, or inconsistent with those contained in the Buyer’s offer. Acceptance of the Seller’s products shall in workmanship; (ii) that no alterations or repairs have been made to the goods except with the Seller’s written consent; (iii) that the defect was
all events constitute such assent. not caused by any act of the Buyer or its agents; and (iv) that the defect was not caused by any matter beyond the reasonable control of the
Seller, including, without limitation, accident or normal wear and tear. (b) THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY UNLESS THE SELLER’S PRODUCTS
2. Documents. ARE: (I) USED IN DOMESTIC PLUMBING APPLICATIONS; (II) INSTALLED BY A LICENSED CONTRACTOR, PLUMBER OR QUALIFIED EQUIPMENT
Unless provided otherwise in the Agreement, all catalog descriptions, illustrations, drawings and literature or independently submitted INSTALLATION PROFESSIONAL; AND (III) INSTALLED AND OPERATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PUBLISHED HYDROFIT / HYDRONIX WATER
estimates of performance, weights and measurements or other specifications provided by the Seller are mere approximations and the TECHNOLOGY SPECIFICATIONS. (c) All costs and expenses, including freight charges, customs duties, and insurance incurred in returning the
Seller reserves the right to alter or amend them at any time. The Seller reserves the right to correct clerical or technical errors in the contract goods to the Seller’s premises in accordance with this provision shall be paid by the Buyer. The benefit of this warranty shall not be assignable
documents. The Buyer shall furnish with his order all necessary specifications and information. The Seller takes no responsibility for goods by the Buyer. (d) THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT EXTEND TO ANY GOODS NOT MANUFACTURED BY THE SELLER EVEN THOUGH SUPPLIED BY THE
manufactured, priced or delivered not in accordance with the order or the specifications unless the Buyer’s order and specifications are clear SELLER NOR DOES IT EXTEND TO ANY SECOND-HAND OR RECONDITIONED GOODS NOR DOES IT EXTEND TO COMPONENTS MANUFACTURED BY THE
and correct. SELLER BUT INSTALLED, ATTACHED OR WELDED BY THE BUYER OR HIS CUSTOMER ON EQUIPMENT NOT MANUFACTURED BY THE SELLER. GOODS
3. Prices. NOT MANUFACTURED BY THE SELLER CARRY ONLY THE WARRANTY (IF ANY) OF THEIR MAKERS AND THE BUYER IS ENTITLED TO THE BENEFIT
Unless otherwise provided, all prices contained in our quotations and written acceptances are ex-works and do not include the cost of packing. THEREOF ONLY SO FAR AS THE SELLER HAS THE POWER TO TRANSFER IT. (E) THIS WARRANTY COMPRISES THE SOLE AND ENTIRE WARRANTY
All orders are accepted on the condition that all such prices are subject to revision by the Seller at any time before the goods are dispatched PERTAINING TO ITEMS PROVIDED HEREUNDER; THE SELLER MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, OR REPRESENTATION OF ANY KIND
to take account of any price change. In the event that the Buyer does not place the entire order quoted by the Seller for the Buyer, the Seller WHATSOEVER. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PURPOSE, WHETHER EXPRESSED
reserves the right to revise its prices. The Seller also reserves the right to revise its prices if the Buyer modifies the specification or quantity of OR IMPLIED, OR ARISING BY OPERATION OF LAW, TRADE USAGE, OR COURSE OF DEALING, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. (f) NOTWITHSTANDING
the goods or the delivery requirements after the order has been accepted by the Seller. THE FOREGOING, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER ON ITEMS BUILT OR ACQUIRED WHOLLY OR PARTIALLY TO THE BUYER’S DESIGNS
OR SPECIFICATIONS.
4. Advice.
All advice given in connection with the Seller’s goods is provided without charge to the Buyer. ANY ADVICE AND ASSISTANCE GIVEN BY THE 15. Limited Remedy.
SELLER TO THE BUYER IS GIVEN AT THE BUYER’S RISK, AND THE SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE OR CLAIM ARISING THE SELLER’S LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE ITEMS SOLD OR THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY
THEREFROM. TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE ITEMS SOLD. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS
5. Payment. ARISING FROM OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY ITEMS SOLD, WHETHER ALLEGED TO ARISE FROM BREACH
(a) Unless otherwise provided in the Agreement, or explicitly agreed upon in writing by the Seller, payment is due in full 30 days from date OF CONTRACT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, OR IN TORT, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, NEGLIGENCE, FAILURE TO WARN OR STRICT
of shipment of the items purchased herein under. (b) In the case of an installment contract, deliveries or parts, payment for each installment LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER OR ANY OTHER ENTITY FOR MORE THAN THE INVOICE PRICE RECEIVED BY THE
delivery or part shall be made under sub-clause (a) as if the same constituted a separate agreement. (c) Amounts not timely paid shall bear SELLER FOR ANY NON-CONFORMING PRODUCTS. THE SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER OR ANY OTHER ENTITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY,
interest at the rate of 2-1/2% above the Seller’s bank’s prime rate from time to time in force. (d) In the event that the Buyer fails within one PROPERTY DAMAGE, OR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, SPECIAL, OR OTHER DAMAGES
calendar month of the date for payment to effect any payment which may be due under the Agreement or any agreement with the Seller, or OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, THE LOSS OF PROFITS, PRODUCTS, OR
if the Buyer commits any breach of the Agreement, or if the Buyer becomes insolvent or commits any act of bankruptcy or contemplation of PRODUCTION, OR THE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, HOWEVER CAUSED. THE SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER OR ANY OTHER ENTITY
liquidation, the Seller will be entitled, without prejudice to the Seller’s other rights, to terminate the Agreement or any unfulfilled part thereof, ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT OR EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, TORT, NEGLIGENCE,
or at the Seller’s option to make partial deliveries. FAILURE TO WARN, OR STRICT LIABILITY, AND WHETHER OR NOT THE SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE
6. Modifications and Cancellations. ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS PROVISION IS TO LIMIT THE LIABILITY OF THE SELLER ARISING OUT OF THE SALE OF PRODUCTS TO THE BUYER
This Agreement is not subject to oral modification or cancellation. A Buyer’s request for modification or cancellation will not be incorporated WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, OR ANY OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY. THESE LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING
into the Agreement unless the request is accepted by the Seller in a writing that amends the Agreement. Acceptance of any such requested ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE PROVISIONS OF ANY OTHER AGREEMENT BETWEEN
modification or cancellation shall be at the Seller’s discretion and shall be upon such terms and conditions as the Seller may require. THE SELLER AND THE BUYER.
7. Handling Charge. 16. Indemnity for Infringement of Intellectual Property Rights.
Goods supplied in accordance with the Buyer’s order may later be returned to the Seller at the Seller’s discretion provided the return is pre- (a) The Buyer shall defend and indemnify the Seller against all actions, claims, demands, penalties and costs by third parties in tort, or for
authorized in writing, and the merchandise is unused, in original packages, unaltered, clean and no older than 60 days from the date of infringement, or alleged infringement, of patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade dress, trade secret or other rights of any third party resulting
shipment by the Seller. The Buyer will be required to pay to the Seller a handling charge of 25% of the purchase price of the returned goods. A from the goods manufactured in accordance with the Buyer’s specifications or based on any information provided by the Buyer. The Buyer
copy of the original invoice for the merchandise must accompany all returns. will defend any action against the Seller for title, patent, trademark, copyright infringement, or other claimed by a third party at the Buyer’s
sole cost and expense. (b) The Seller shall have no liability for infringement of any patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade dress, trade secrets
8. Delivery. or similar rights except as provided in this provision. The Seller will defend and indemnify the Buyer against allegations of infringement of
(a) Any delivery dates quoted are approximate only and the Seller shall have no liability for any delays in delivery. (b) Unless provided patents, trademarks, copyrights, trade dress and trade secrets ("Intellectual Property Rights"). The Seller will defend at its expense and will pay
otherwise, delivery of the goods shall be made when the Seller has notified the Buyer that the goods are ready for dispatch. Regardless of the cost of any settlement or damages awarded in an action brought against the Buyer based on an allegation that an item sold pursuant to
the method of delivery, delivery shall be made F.O.B. Seller’s plant, where the risk of loss shall thereupon pass to the Buyer upon the Seller’s this contract infringes the Intellectual Property Rights of a third party. The Seller’s obligation to defend and indemnify the Buyer is contingent
delivery to a carrier. Notwithstanding that the Seller’s prices are ex-works, the Seller is prepared by special contract to procure carriage or on the Buyer notifying the Seller within 10 days after sole control over the defense of any allegations or actions, including all negotiations
freight and insurance on behalf of the Buyer and at Buyer’s cost in which event the Seller shall be under no liability for damage in transit or for settlement or compromise. If an item sold hereunder is subject to a claim that it infringes the Intellectual Property Rights of a third party,
loss or damage to the goods beyond the point at which the Seller contracts to deliver the same. (c) The Seller will not make drop shipments. the Seller may, at its sole expense and option, procure for the Buyer the right to continue using said item, replace or modify said item so as
9. Inspection and Rejection. to make it non-infringing, or offer to accept return of said item and return the purchase price less a reasonable allowance for depreciation.
(a) The following provisions shall apply in relation to all deliveries of goods: the Seller shall not be held liable for any claims of damage in Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Seller shall have no liability for claims of infringement based on information provided by Buyer, or directed
transit, shortage of delivery or loss of goods, unless in the case of shortage of delivery, a separate notice in writing is given to the carrier to items delivered hereunder for which the designs are specified in combination or use in a system of any item sold hereunder. The foregoing in
concerned and to the Seller within three (3) days of the receipt of the goods, followed by a complete claim in writing within five (5) days this provision shall constitute the Seller’s sole and exclusive liability and the Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy for infringement of Intellectual
of receipt of the goods and in the case of loss of goods, a separate notice in writing is given to the carrier concerned and to the Seller and Property Rights.
a complete claim in writing made within thirty (30) days of the date of consignment. The Buyer must inspect the goods on arrival from the 17. Lien.
carrier; however, where goods are accepted from the carrier concerned without being inspected, the delivery book of the carrier concerned In addition to any right of lien to which the Seller may by law be entitled, the Seller shall have a general lien on all goods of the Buyer in the
must be signed "not examined". The Seller shall have the right to inspect the goods at the Buyer’s premises in respect to any such claims made Seller’s possession (although such goods or some of them may have been paid for) for the unpaid price of any other goods sold and delivered
by the Buyer and the Buyer shall retain such goods until the Seller has inspected such goods or until the Seller has notified the Buyer that the to the Buyer by the Seller under the same or other contracts.
Seller does not wish to inspect such goods. Any breach of these conditions in this provision shall serve as a waiver to any claim brought by the
buyer. (b) Without prejudice to the Seller’s other rights, should the Buyer fail for any reason to send the Seller forwarding instructions within 18. Waiver.
ninety (90) days after the date of the Seller’s notification that the goods are ready for dispatch or to accept delivery of the goods, the Seller The Seller’s rights shall not be affected or restricted by any indulgence or forbearance granted to the Buyer. No waiver by the Seller of any
shall be entitled at the Buyer’s risk and expense to store the goods and/or to procure or effect storage of the goods elsewhere. Goods so stored breach shall operate as a waiver of any later breach.
shall be paid for as if they had been dispatched and/or accepted. 19. Force Majeure.
10. Special Tooling. The Seller shall be excused from performing any of its obligations under this Agreement which are prevented or delayed by any occurrence
Where it is necessary for the Seller to manufacture or to purchase special tooling, including without limitation tools, dies, jigs, mandrills, not within the reasonable control of the Seller, including but not limited to, accidents, acts of God, destruction or damage to the goods or
fixtures, molds, and patterns, in order to execute a contract, the Buyer will be charged with all or a proportion of the cost of such special tools. the Seller’s manufacturing plant, delays or failures in delivery of carriers or suppliers, shortages of materials, strikes or other labor matters,
Such special tooling shall be and remain the Seller’s property notwithstanding payment of any charges made by the Buyer. In no event will floods, earthquakes, fire, riots, explosions, or any regulations, rules, ordinances or orders of any governmental authority, federal, state or local,
the Buyer acquire any interest in apparatus belonging to the Seller which is utilized in the manufacture of the items sold hereunder, even if whether such cause exists at the date of the order or not.
such apparatus has been specially converted or adopted for such manufacture and notwithstanding any charges paid by the Buyer therefore. 20. Buyer’s Representation of Solvency.
Unless otherwise agreed, the Seller shall have the right to alter, discard or otherwise dispose of any special tooling or other property in its The Buyer hereby represents that as of the signing of this Agreement it was not insolvent within the meaning of the Uniform Commercial
sole discretion at any time. Code or any Bankruptcy Laws.
11. Test and Performance. 21. Assignment and Delegation.
(a) The Seller’s goods are, where practicable, submitted to the Seller’s standard test before delivery. If special tests are required, these shall The rights and obligations of the parties under this Agreement may not be assigned or delegated, except on the express written consent of
be made at the Seller’s premises unless otherwise agreed, and will be subject to an extra charge. (b) The Seller accepts no liability for failure the other party to the assignment or delegation.
to attain any performance figures quoted by the Seller unless the Seller specifically has guaranteed them with an agreed sum as liquidation
damages and the Buyer has suffered actual loss by reason of the failure to attain the figures quoted. (c) Any particulars of weights and 22. Integration.
measurements, power and consumption, power output or performance relating to the goods and like matters furnished by the Seller to the The rights and obligations of the parties and the terms and conditions set forth herein, together with any amendments, modifications and any
Buyer in the Seller’s catalogs, literature or otherwise, are approximate and are intended only to present a general idea of the goods to be different terms and conditions expressly accepted by the Seller in writing, shall constitute a complete and exclusive statement of the terms
supplied and unless previously agreed specifically in writing shall not form part of the Agreement. of this Agreement. This Agreement supersedes not only all prior agreements, but also oral agreements made contemporaneously with the
execution of this Agreement. All such materials may not be used to supplement, explain, or contradict the terms of this Agreement.
12. Buyer’s Property.
Any designs, tools, patterns, materials, drawings, confidential information or equipment furnished to the Seller by the Buyer, or any other 23. Severability.
items which become the Buyer’s property, may be considered obsolete and may be destroyed by the Seller after two (2) consecutive years have If any of these conditions or any part thereof purports to exclude or restrict or limit any liability and such exclusion or restriction or limitation is
elapsed without the Buyer placing an order for the items which are manufactured using such property. The Seller shall not be responsible for prohibited or rendered void or unenforceable by any legislation to which it is subject, or is itself prohibited or rendered void or unenforceable by any
any loss or damage to such property while it is in the Seller’s possession or control. legislation to which it is subject, then the exclusion, restriction or limitation on the condition or part thereof in question shall be so prohibited or
rendered void or unenforceable and the validity or enforceability of any other part of these provisions shall not thereby be affected.
13. Taxes.
Unless otherwise indicated, all prices and charges are exclusive of excise, sales, use, property, occupational or like taxes which may be imposed 24. Governing Law/Limitation on Actions.
by any taxing authority upon the manufacture, sale or delivery of the items sold hereunder. If any such taxes must be paid by the Seller, or if The terms, conditions, rights, and obligations under this Agreement shall be construed under the laws of the State of California, without regard
the Seller is liable for the collection of such tax, the amount thereof shall be in addition to the amounts for the item sold. The Buyer agrees to to principles of conflicts of laws. No actions arising out of the sale of the items sold hereunder or this Agreement may be brought by the Buyer
pay all such taxes or to reimburse the Seller therefore upon receipt of its invoice. If the Buyer claims exemption from any sales, use or other tax more than two (2) years after such cause of action accrues.
 ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
GPM Rated Life Lamp Voltage at Visual Audible # of Port Size Water Max. Working
Part Number Timer Length Width Wavelength Microjoules
(LPM) (hrs) Watts 50/60HZ Warning Warning Lamps I/O Chamber Pressure Temp.
1 1/4” MNPT 10.47” 2” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA- 1C (3.8)
9,000 10W 110V/220V LED BUZZER 1 (.635 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (26.594 cm) (5.080 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
2 1/4” MNPT 13.74” 2.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA-2C (7.57) 9,000 14W 110V/220V LED BUZZER 1 (.635 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (34.900 cm) (6.350 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
4 1/2” MNPT 15.50” 2.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA-4C (15.14)
9,000 17W 110V/220V LED BUZZER 1 (1.270 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (39.37 cm) (6.350 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
6 1/2” MNPT 23.23” 2.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA-6C (22.71)
9,000 24W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1 (1.270 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (59.00 cm) (6.35 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
8 3/4” MNPT 27.87” 2.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA-8C (30.28) 9,000 32W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1 (1.905 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (70.79 cm) (6.35 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
12 3/4” MNPT 36.81” 2.5” 125 PSI 35oF - 104oF
UVA-12C (45.42) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1 (1.905 cm)
STAINLESS 304 - (93.50 cm) (6.35 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2 (1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
24 1” MNPT 36.93” 3.5” 125 PSI
UVA-24B (90.85) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 2 (2.540 cm)
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (8.89 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
36 1.5” MNPT 36.93” 5.5” 125 PSI
UVA-36B (136.27) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 3 (3.810 cm)
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (13.97 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
50 1.5” MNPT 36.93” 5.5” 125 PSI
UVA-50B (189.27) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 4 (3.810 cm)
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (13.97 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
2” or 2.5” 36.93” 5.5” 125 PSI
60
UVA-60B (227.12) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 5 (5.080 or 6.350 cm)
FLANGE
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (13.97 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
2” or 2.5” MNPT 36.93” 6.26” 125 PSI
80
UVA-80B (302.83) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 6 (5.080 or 6.350 cm)
FLANGE
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (15.90 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
2” or 2.5” MNPT 36.93” 8.62” 125 PSI
100
UVA-100B (378.54) 9,000 39W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 8 (5.080 or 6.350 cm)
FLANGE
STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (21.90 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
150 36.93” 8.62” 125 PSI
UVA-150B (567.81) 9,000 87W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 6 3” MNPT
(7.62 cm) FLANGE STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (21.90 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
200 36.93” 8.62” 125 PSI
UVA-200B (757.08) 9,000 87W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 8 4” MNPT
(10.16 cm) FLANGE STAINLESS 304  (93.80 cm) (21.90 cm) 8.79 kgF/cm2
35oF - 104oF
(1.67oC - 40oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2

HIGH OUTPUT ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

GPM Rated Life Lamp Voltage at Visual Audible # of Port Size Water Max. Working
Part Number Timer Length Width Wavelength Microjoules
(LPM) (Days) Watts 50/60HZ Warning Warning Lamps I/O Chamber Pressure Temp.
18 3/4” FNPT
UVA-418HO (70) 365 48W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1
1” MNPT
STAINLESS 304  23.23” 3.5” 125 PSI 36oF - 104oF
(2oC - 48oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
30 3/4” FNPT
UVA-630HO (113) 365 58W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1
1” MNPT
STAINLESS 304  27.87” 3.5” 125 PSI 36oF - 104oF
(2oC - 48oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2
46
UVA-946HO (175) 365 90W 110V/220V LED INDICATOR W/ ALARM 1 1.5” MNPT STAINLESS 304  36.81” 3.5” 125 PSI 36oF - 104oF
(2oC - 48oC)
254 nm 30 mJ/cm2

ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZATION SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

Part Number Lamp Quartz Sleeve Electronic Ballast Additional Accessories Specific to Your UV System

UVA- 1C GL10PP QS10 BEB-1024 UV-NUT-1 - - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER -

UVA-2C GL14PP QS14 BEB-1024 UV-NUT-1 - - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER -
UVA-4C GL17PP QS17 BEB-1024 UV-NUT-1 - - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER -
UVA-6C GL24PP QS24 BEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 - - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-8C GL32PP QS32 BEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-32 SPRING - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-12C GL39PP QS39 BEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING - UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-24B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-36B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-50B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-60B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-80B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-100B GL39PP QS39 ZEB-2439 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-150B GL87PP QS39 ZEB-55155 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG
UVA-200B GL87PP QS39 ZEB-55155 UV-NUT-1/ UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-TIMER UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG

HIGH OUTPUT ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZATION SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

Part Number Lamp Quartz Sleeve Electronic Ballast Additional Accessories Specific to Your UV System

UVA-418HO GLHO48PP QS48HO HOB-4890 UV-NUT-1/UV-NUT-2 UV-32 SPRING UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG CLP-35UV
UVA-630HO GLHO58PP QS58HO HOB-4890 UV-NUT-1/UV-NUT-2 UV-32 SPRING UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG CLP-35UV
UVA-946HO GLHO90PP QS90HO HOB-4890 UV-NUT-1/UV-NUT-2 UV-39 SPRING UV-SEAL UV-WASHER UV-PLUG CLP-35UV

LIT-PSUV-CAT18 03/01/18

Product Ratings Warranty Information Distributed by:

RoHS • Limited 5-year warranty on stainless steel housing
COMPLIANT • Limited 1-year warranty on electronics

P.O. Box 2235

Chino Hills, CA 91709 USA
©2018 POLARIS SCIENTIFIC UV. All Rights Reserved.
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

El sistema de ozonización PTA

está especialmente diseñado para ser
utilizado en cualquier lugar donde sea
necesaria agua libre de microorganismos con
un grado de desinfección elevado.
Lo mismo en plantas purificadoras, tratadoras
de agua, embotelladoras, restaurantes, líneas de
producción, laboratorios, etc.

Fabricado con componentes de uso industrial.

Gabinete tipo NEMA 3, especiales para trabajo
eléctrico.

La más alta tecnología en producción de ozono

nos ofrece consumos mínimos de energía y el
mayor rendimiento en la conversión de
oxígeno en ozono.

El ozono es generado por medio de la tecnología

de efecto corona de alta eficiencia con módulos y
materiales ecológicos no contaminantes.

Flujo (LPM) oxígeno Producción de ozono

(g/h)
1 4.5
2 6.5
4 8
5 10

Modelo Producción Voltaje Dimensiones*

Biozon PTA 10100 10000 mg/h 127 VAC 400x300x200 mm

*Las dimensiones de los gabinetes pueden variar.

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

Sus elementos principales son:

- Gabinete metálico de acero al carbón

- Generador de ozono
- Interruptor de encendido/apagado
- Indicador de Voltaje de trabajo AC
- Ventilador.
- Válvula check
- Cable de conexión a corriente
- Fusible
- Manguera de PVC
- Sensor de flujo (opcional)
- Compresor (opcional)

Servicios requeridos:

- Alimentación eléctrica 127 V 60 Hz.

- Alimentación de oxígeno o aire seco
- Presión máxima de trabajo 2.5 bares.
- Temperatura de operción menor a los 30°C.
Antes de poner el equipo en funcionamiento
asegurarse de:
Instalación:
- Que no se obstruya el paso del aire por la
El ozonizador debe estar instalado en un lugar rendija del ventilador.
donde se encuentre protegido del sol y la lluvia. - Se encuentra conectado a 127 V 60 Hz.
Se sugiere que sea fijado a un muro utilizando - No intente abrir el equipo mientras está en
tornillos y taquetes de expansión. operación, ya que se apagará automáticamente
Se recomienda que las conexiones eléctricas por su seguridad.
sean de 127 V 60 Hz.
Las consideraciones de instalación son:
Conecte la toma de oxigeno al equipo, la presión
del sistema no debe ser mayor a 2.5 bar. El equipo debe de estar por lo menos 30 cm por
(aplica sólo para modelos que utilicen oxígeno o arriba de la tubería o recipiente donde se llevará a
aire seco para generar ozono). cabo la inyección de ozono.

Encienda el dispositivo con el interruptor y La manguera de silicón que alimenta el ozono no

comenzará a producir ozono. debe presentar dobleces o mordeduras.

Las tuberías, válvulas y recipientes por donde

pase el ozono, deben ser resistentes a este, ya
que el ozono es un agente altamente oxidante.

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

A continuación se muestran instalaciones típicas:

Cable

Manguera

Tubo

Tren de
filtrado
Entrada
de Agua Salida de Agua

Sensor de Flujo
para activación sólo cuando
exista flujo de agua

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

A continuación se muestran instalaciones típicas:

Llave
Cable

Manguera

Tubería de
PVC

Venturi
Salida de agua
purificada

Filtros

Sensor de Flujo
para activación sólo
cuando exista flujo de
agua

Bomba
Entrada de agua

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

Póliza de Garantía

Basktek, S.A. de C.V garantiza este producto por el término de un año en todas sus partes y mano de
obra contra cualquier defecto de fabricación y funcionamiento a partir de la fecha de entrega al consu-
midor final.

Condiciones
1. Para hacer efectiva esta garantía, no podrán exigirse mayores requisitos que la presentación de esta
póliza junto con el producto en el lugar donde fue adquirido, o en el centro de servicio que se indica a
continuación:
Basktek, S.A. de C.V
Juan A Ingres No.140 Loc 1, Nonoalco
Benito Juarez, C.P. 03700, CDMX
Tels. 5698-5422, 5698-9533 y 01800 832 22 26
http://www.biozon.com.mx
E-mail: [email protected]

2. La empresa se compromete a reparar o cambiar el producto así como las piezas y componentes de-
fectuosos del mismo, sin ningún cargo para el consumidor. Los gastos de transportación que se
deriven de su cumplimiento serán cubiertos por Basktek, S.A. de C.V.

3. El tiempo de reparación en ningún caso será mayor a 20 días hábiles contados a partir de la
recepción del producto en cualquiera de los sitios en donde pueda hacerse efectiva la garantía.

4. Las refacciones y partes pueden ser adquiridas en los centros de servicio mencionados
anteriormente.

5. En caso de que la presente garantía se extraviara, el consumidor puede recurrir a su proveedor para
que le tramite otra Póliza de Garantía previa, presentación de la factura o nota de compra respectiva.

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
Biozon PTA
Instructivo de operación y garantía

Esta garantía no será válida en los siguientes casos:

a) Cuando el equipo haya sido utilizado en condiciones distintas a las normales.

b) Cuando el equipo no haya sido utilizado de acuerdo al instructivo de operación proporcionado.

c) Cuando el equipo haya sufrido un deterioro esencial, irreparable y grave por causas atribuibles al
consumidor.

d) Cuando el equipo haya sido alterado, reparado o tratado de repararse por el personal no autorizado
por los centros de servicio.

Basktek, S.A. de C.V. garantiza:

Generador de ozono, marca Biozon, modelo Biozon PTA

Fecha de adquisición
No. de Serie
Comprador
Dirección
Distribuido por
Dirección
Colonia o poblado
Delegación o Municipio
Teléfono
C.P.
Ciudad
Estado

Juan A. Ingres No. 140 Loc 1, Nonoalco, Benito Juarez, CP. 03700, CDMX
www.biozon.com.mx
 AT SERIES
PRESSURE TANKS

DESIGN PARAMETERS

• Cycle Test

• Safety Factor

SAFETY FACTORS

• 100,000 Cycle Test without leaks

Operating Parameters:
Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 psi (10.5 bar)
• Safety Factor

4:1 (Minimum burst at 600 psi)

Maximum Operating Temperature: 120 °F (49 °C)

NSF
Waranty:
10 Year Warranty for: 6” - 13” vessels ®

5 Year Warranty for: 14” - 63” vessels

Certified to
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 for
materials requirements only.
* For complete installation and handling instructions, please visit:
https://aquatroltech.com/dl/manuals/AT_Tanks_Manual.pdf COMPONENT

Distributed by:

P R ES S URE TANK S

AQUATROL | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA

WWW.AQUATROLTECH.COM
 AT SERIES
P R ES S U RE TA N K S
PRESSURE TANKS

SIZE (DIAMETER X HEIGHT) CHARACTERISTICS TOTAL VOLUME CAPACITY (MEDIA)†

Part Number Inches Millimeters Connection Color Gallons Liters Ft³
6” AT-0618BL-25T 6 x 18 152 x 457 2.5” T Blue 1.8 6.8 0.30
AT-0713BL-25T 7 x 13 177 x 330 2.5” T Blue 1.9 7.2 0.15
AT-0713BK-25T 7 x 13 177 x 330 2.5” T Black 1.9 7.2 0.15
AT-0717BK-25T 7 x 17 177 x 431 2.5” T Black 2.5 9.5 0.30
7”
AT-0717BL-25T 7 x 17 177 x 431 2.5” T Blue 2.5 9.5 0.30
AT-0735BL-25T 7 x 35 177 x 889 2.5” T Blue 5.2 19.7 0.50
AT-0744BL-25T 7 x 44 177 x 1117 2.5” T Blue 6.4 24.2 0.60
AT-0817BL-25T 8 x 17 203 x 431 2.5” T Blue 2.9 11.0 0.33
AT-0835BL-25T 8 x 35 203 x 889 2.5” T Blue 6.6 25.0 0.55
8”
AT-0844BL-25T 8 x 44 203 x 1117 2.5” T Blue 8.7 32.9 0.75
AT-0844BK-25T 8 x 44 203 x 1117 2.5” T Black 8.7 32.9 0.75
AT-0935BL-25T 9 x 35 228 x 889 2.5” T Blue 8.3 31.4 0.80
9” AT-0948BL-25T 9 x 48 228 x 1219 2.5” T Blue 12.7 48.1 1.00
AT-0948BK-25T 9 x 48 228 x 1219 2.5” T Black 12.7 48.1 1.00
AT-1017BL-25T 10 x 17 254 x 431 2.5” T Blue 4.4 16.7 0.50
AT-1017BK-25T 10 x 17 254 x 431 2.5” T Black 4.4 16.7 0.50
AT-1035BK-25T 10 x 35 254 x 889 2.5” T Black 10.2 38.6 0.75
10” AT-1035BL-25T 10 x 35 254 x 889 2.5” T Blue 10.2 38.6 0.75
AT-1044BL-25T 10 x 44 254 x 1117 2.5” T Blue 13.1 49.6 1.00
AT-1054BK-25T 10 x 54 254 x 1371 2.5” T Black 16.4 62.1 1.50
AT-1054BL-25T 10 x 54 254 x 1371 2.5” T Blue 16.4 62.1 1.50
AT-1248BL-25T 12 x 48 304 x 1219 2.5” T Blue 21.0 79.5 1.60
AT-1252BL-25T 12 x 52 304 x 1320 2.5” T Blue 22.2 84.0 1.75
12”
AT-1252BK-25T 12 x 52 304 x 1320 2.5” T Black 22.2 84.0 1.75
AT-1265BL-25T 12 x 65 304 x 1651 2.5” T Blue 28.0 106.0 1.85
AT-1354BL-25T 13 x 54 330 x 1371 2.5” T Blue 27.5 104.1 2.00
13”
AT-1354BK-25T 13 x 54 330 x 1371 2.5” T Black 27.5 104.1 2.00
AT-1465BL-25T 14 x 65 355 x 1651 2.5” T Blue 40.6 153.7 3.00
14” AT-1465BK-25T 14 x 65 355 x 1651 2.5” T Black 40.6 153.7 3.00
AT-1465BL-4T 14 x 65 355 x 1651 4” T Blue 40.6 153.7 3.00
AT-1665BL-25T 16 x 65 406 x 1651 2.5” T Blue 49.0 185.5 4.00
AT-1665BK-25T 16 x 65 406 x 1651 2.5” T Black 49.0 185.5 4.00
16”
AT-1665BL-4T 16 x 65 406 x 1651 4” T Blue 49.0 185.5 4.00
AT-1665NA-4T4B 16 x 65 406 x 1651 4”T 4”B Natural 49.0 185.5 4.00
AT-1865NA-4T 18 x 65 457 x 1651 4”T Natural 66.7 252.5 5.00
18”
AT-1865NA-4T4B 18 x 65 457 x 1651 4”T 4”B Natural 66.7 252.5 5.00
AT-2162NA-4T 21 x 62 533 x 1574 4”T Natural 88.0 333.1 7.00
21”
AT-2162NA-4T4B 21 x 62 533 x 1574 4”T 4”B Natural 88.0 333.1 7.00
AT-2472NA-4T 24 x 72 609 x 1828 4”T Natural 126.8 479.9 10.00
24”
AT-2472NA-4T4B 24 x 72 609 x 1828 4”T 4”B Natural 126.8 479.9 10.00
AT-3072NA-4T 30 x 72 762 x 1828 4”T Natural 195.5 740.0 15.00
30”
AT-3072NA-4T4B 30 x 72 762 x 1828 4”T 4”B Natural 195.5 740.0 15.00
AT-3672NA-4T 36 x 72 914 x 1828 4”T Natural 283.0 1071.2 20.00
AT-3672NA-4T4B 36 x 72 914 x 1828 4”T 4”B Natural 283.0 1071.2 20.00
36”
AT-3672NA-6T6B 36 x 72 914 x 1828 6”T 6”B Natural 283.0 1071.2 20.00
AT-3694NA-6T6B 36 x 94 914 x 2388 6”T 6”B Natural 318.0 1203.6 30.00
42” AT-4272NA-6T6B 42 x 72 1066 x 1828 6”T 6”B Natural 290.6 1099.9 30.00
AT-4872NA-6T6B 48 x 72 1219 x 1828 6”T 6”B Natural 477.7 1808.1 40.00
48”
AT-4894NA-6T6B 48 x 94 1219 x 2387 6”T 6”B Natural 657.1 2487.1 40.00
AT-6094NA-6T6B 60 x 94 1524 x 2387 6”T 6”B Natural 710.2 2688.1 60.00
60”
AT-60110NA-6T6B 60 x 110 1524 x 2794 6”T 6”B Natural 896.2 3392.1 75.00
AT-6370NA-6T6B 63 x 70 1600 x 1778 6”T 6”B Natural 687.0 2600.3 60.00
63”
AT-6383NA-6T6B 63 x 83 1600 x 2108 6”T 6”B Natural 832.3 3150.3 70.00
† The listed resin volume are nominal values and are subjet to change based on user preference and experience.

LIT-AT-DS 08/06/20
Colors Options : BL - Blue NA - Natural BK - Black

WWW.AQUATROLTECH.COM | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA

 TOP DISTRIBUTORS |
COMMERCIAL & INDUSTRIAL

AQT-TD-1199
Aquatrol Stack Top Distributor,
1.5” Riser, Screw, 3.5” X 5.5”

Aquatrol Top Stack Distributor for top mounted valves.

The stack distributor is designed to diffuse or break up
the inlet water flow.

Installation is accomplished by simply pinning or screwing in

the top stack distributor and diffuser or snapping the top baffle
diffuser directly inside the control valve. 3.5” stack diameter X
5.5” stack height for 1.5” riser pipe.

Alternative Replacement Part for:

Clack Part Number: D1199 TANK DIAMETER:
14”-36”

FOR VALVES:
AQT-285
AQT-290

FLOW RATE:
70 - 85 gpm

AQT-TD-MV2
Aquatrol Stack Top Distributor,
1.5” Riser, Threaded Valve Connection, 3.5” X 5.5”

Aquatrol Top Stack Distributor for top mounted manual valves

w/threaded connection. The stack distributor is designed to
diffuse or break up the inlet water flow.

Installation is accomplished by simply threading directly to the

control valve. 3.5” stack diameter X 5.5” stack height for 1.5”
riser pipe.

TANK DIAMETER:
14”-36”

FOR VALVES:
AQT-MSV-2
AQT-MFV-2

FLOW RATE:
70 - 85 gpm

AQUATROL | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA Top Distributors | Commercial & Industrial 5
HUB & LATERAL DISTRIBUTORS |
COMMERCIAL & INDUSTRIAL

AQT-HL-7160
Aquatrol HUB Distributor, 6 Threaded Laterals,
2” Straight Connect, Solvent, 16” tanks

Aquatrol Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Systems are designed
specifically to fit into a 4” bottom mineral tank opening eliminating
the need for a 6” bottom hole where a greater possibility of leaks exist.

The Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Series is designed

for use in 16” diameter fiberglass mineral tanks. This Series consist
of an ABS hub, 6 PVC slotted laterals with 3⁄4” threaded adaptors,
4”-8UN tank adaptor and 2” CPVC straight connector.
Straight Thread

TANK FOR FLOW Alternative Replacement Part for:

DIAMETER: VALVES: RATE:
Clack Part Number: D7160
16” LATERAL 120 - 141 gpm
VALVES

AQT-HL-B5669
Aquatrol HUB Distributor, 6 Threaded Laterals,
2” Straight Connect, Solvent, 18”-21” tanks

Aquatrol Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Systems are designed
specifically to fit into a 4” bottom mineral tank opening eliminating
the need for a 6” bottom hole where a greater possibility of leaks exist.

The Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Series is designed for
use in 18” - 21” diameter fiberglass mineral tanks. This Series consist
of an ABS hub, 6 PVC slotted laterals with 3⁄4” threaded adaptors,
4”-8UN tank adaptor and 2” CPVC straight connector.

Straight Thread
Alternative Replacement Part for:
TANK FOR FLOW Fleck/Bajonet Part Number: 5669
DIAMETER: VALVES: RATE: Clack Part Number: D7161
18”-21” LATERAL 120 - 141 gpm
VALVES

AQT-HL-7161
Aquatrol HUB Distributor, 6 Threaded Laterals,
2” Straight Connect, Solvent, 24” tanks

Aquatrol Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Systems are designed
specifically to fit into a 4” bottom mineral tank opening eliminating
the need for a 6” bottom hole where a greater possibility of leaks exist.

The Bottom Mount Hub and Lateral Distributor Series is designed for use
in 24” diameter fiberglass mineral tanks. This Series consist of an ABS hub,
6 PVC slotted laterals with 3⁄4” threaded adaptors, 4”-8UN tank adaptor
and 2” CPVC straight connector.

Straight Thread Alternative Replacement Part for:

TANK FOR FLOW Fleck/Bajonet Part Number: 5670
DIAMETER: VALVES: RATE: Clack Part Number: D7161
24” LATERAL 138 - 155 gpm
VALVES

16 Hub & Lateral Distributors | Commercial & Industrial AQUATROL | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA
 AQT-285
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
AQT-285 Timer/Meter Valves
Aquatrol 285 Timer/Meter Mechanical Valves offer a flanged body design for convenient maintenance and are made
of solid lead-free brass for superior strength and durability. The AQT-285 also offers a NH piston option and has a
time-tested piston, seal and spacer design.

FEATURES
• 1.5" Control valve
• Lead free brass body
• Adjustable 5 cycle control (Mech. & Digital NX)
• Backwash capacity for tanks up to 30" (Filters)
and 36" (Softeners) diameter
• Continuous flow rate of 51 gpm
with backwash of 49 gpm
• NH option available
• Time clock: 12 days
• Meter: immediate / delayed regeneration
• Digital NX Controller
• Remote Signal
• Aux. Relay
• Chemical Pump Option
• English / Spanish Language

Models: Meter:
AQT-285ST-HW: Softener Timer - HW Accuracy Range: 1.5 - 75 gpm (5.7 - 284 lpm) ± 5%
AQT-285ST-NH: Softener Timer - NH Capacity Range: Standard: 625 - 10,625 gal (2.5 - 40.2m3)
AQT-285SM-HW: Softener Meter - HW Extended: 3,125 - 53,125 gal (12-200m3)

AQT-275SM-NH: Softener Meter / NH

Valve Specification:
AQT-285S-NX-HW: Elec Softener Timer / Meter - HW
Inlet/Outlet: 1-1/2" NPT
AQT-285S-NX-NH: Elec Softener Timer / Meter - NH
Mounting Base: 4" - 8 UN
AQT-285FT: Filter Timer
Distributor Pilot: 1.96" OD
AQT-285F-NX: Electronic Filter Timer
Drain Line: 1"
HW - Hard Water Bypass. NH - No Hard Water Bypass.
Brine Line: 1/2"
Flow Rate 50 psi (3.5 bar) Valve Alone:
Height: 7-1/2" (190 mm)
Continuous 15 psi (1 bar) Drop: 51 gpm (193 lpm)
Weight (Valve Gross): Timer 22 lb (10 kg)
Peak 25 psi (1.7 bar) Drop: 66 gpm (250 lpm) Meter 27.6 lb (12.5 kg)
Max Backwash 25 psi (1.7 bar) Drop: 49 gpm (185 lpm)
CV 1 psi (0.07 bar) Drop: 13.2 Additional Information:
Electrical Rating: 24V - 50Hz, 60Hz
Regeneration/Backwash: Max. VA 74 VA
Downflow/Upflow: Downflow Water Pressure: Hydrostatic: 300 psi (20 bar)
Working: 20 - 125 psi (1.4 bar - 8.6 bar)
Cycles: 5
Temperature: 34 - 110 ºF (1 - 43 ºC)
Adjustable Cycles: All
Time Available: Mechanical 164 Min. / Digital NX
0-4 Hours Each Cycle LIT-AQT-285-DS 06/03/20

Distributed by:

CON TROL VA LV E S

AQUATROL | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA

WWW.AQUATROLTECH.COM
 GCS-1240
COCONUT SHELL GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON

Aquatrol GCS-1240 coconut shell granular activated carbon

GCS-1240 is a high quality coconut shell activated carbon for the removal of dissolved
organic contaminants from water, wastewater and process liquids. The list of contaminants
include taste and odor compounds, organic color, total organic carbon (TOC) and industrial
chemicals such as chlorinated solvents (PCE, TCE).

Aquatrol GCS-1240 is produced under controlled conditions through high temperature

steam activation. Its pore structure enables it to be used for adsorption of both high and low
molecule weight impurities from water and diverse liquids.

GCS-1240 carbon is especially effective for adsorbing trace organic compounds such as
vinyl chloride, MTBE, methylene chloride and trihalomethanes/disinfection by-products.
GCS-1240 is certified to NSF/ANSI 61 standard and complies with the requirements for
activated carbon as defined by the Food Chemicals Codex (FCC) (8th Edition) published by
the U.S. Pharmacopeia.

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Aquatrol GCS-1240 coconut shell activated carbon is typically applied in down-flow
packed bed operations using both pressure and gravity systems. Design considerations
for a carbon system should be based on the user’s operating conditions, treatment
objectives desired, and the chemical nature of the compounds being adsorbed. Downflow
superficial velocity can be from 1 gpm/ft2 to 10gpm/ft2, depending on the application.

APPLICATIONS
Aquatrol GCS-1240 coconut shell activated carbon can be used in a variety of water,
wastewater and process liquid applications for the removal of dissolved organic
compounds. GCS-1240 can be used in applications such as process water purification,
wastewater treatment and industrial chemical purification.

NSF
This product has been tested
and certified by NSF International
against NSF/ANSI Standard 61
® for material requirements only.

COMPONENT
 GCS-1240
COCONUT SHELL GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON

FEATURES
• Coconut shell carbon
• High mechanical strength
• Low ash

BENEFITS
• Strong adsorbing pore structure optimal for the treatment
of chlorine and other organics.
• Hardness and abrasion resistance required for thermal reactivation
and minimizing fines when operations backwashing is required.

TYPICAL PRESSURE DROP (GCS-1240) • Provides a wide range of contaminant removal capabilities.

WATER AT 77oF, 0.90cP

10

9
PRESSURE DROP (inches H2O/ft, Bed)

7 Specifications GCS-1240
6 Iodine Number, mg/g 1000 (min)
5 Ash, wt% 4.0 (max)
4 Moisture (As Packaged), wt% 5 (max)
3 Density (Apparent), g/cc 0.48 (min)
2 Hardness Number 95 (min)
1 12 US Mesh [1.70 mm], wt% 5 (max)
0 < 40 US Mesh [0.425 mm] (PAN), wt% 4 (max)
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

SUPERFICIAL VELOCITY (gpm/sf)

TYPICAL BED EXPANSION DURING BACKWASH PACKAGING

Cu. Ft. Bag and Super sacks available.

GCS-1240 with Water
70

60
44°F
SAFETY MESSAGE
(6.6 °C)
50
% EXPANSION

72°F Wet activated carbon preferentially removes

(22.2 °C)
40
oxygen from air. In closed or partially closed
30

NSF
containers and vessels, oxygen depletion may
20 reach hazardous levels. If workers are to enter a
®
10 vessel containing carbon, appropriate sampling
and work procedures for potentially low oxygen
0 This product has been tested
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 spaces should be followed, including all applicable and certified by NSF International
against NSF/ANSI Standard 61
federal and state requirements. Please refer to the for material requirements only.

SUPERFICIAL VELOCITY (gpm/sf) MSDS for all up to date product safety information. COMPONENT

LIT-GCS-1240-DS 10/29/18

Distributed by:

GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON

AQUATROL | P.O. Box 2235 Chino Hills, CA 91709 • USA

WWW.AQUATROLTECH.COM
BOMBAS CENTRÍFUGAS
 BOMBA
CENTRÍFUGA
EN ACERO
INOXIDABLE
Serie: CD
1 - 3 HP

barmesa.com
SUCCIÓN ACOPLAMIENTO
CD70: 1¼"(3.18 cm) NPT horizontal. Aluminio inyectado.
CD120 y CD200: 1½" (3.81 cm) NPT horizontal.
TORNILLERÍA
DESCARGA Acero inoxidable 304.
1" (2.54 cm) y 1¼" (3.18 cm) NPT vertical.
EMPAQUES
TEMPERATURA MÁXIMA DEL LÍQUIDO Forma "O" de Buna-N.
70 °C (158 °F).
FLECHA
Acero inoxidable 316.
MÁXIMA PRESIÓN DE TRABAJO
125 PSI (8.8 kg/cm²).
MOTOR
TEFC, 3450 RPM (2 polos), 60 Hz, trifásico 230/460
CUERPO
voltios, protección clase IP55 y aislamiento clase F.
Acero inoxidable 304.
Requiere instalación de protección eléctrica por
IMPULSOR sobrecarga.
ESPECIFICACIONES

Diseño: tipo cerrado.

Material: acero inoxidable 304. EQUIPAMIENTO OPCIONAL
Sello de Viton® para alta temperatura.
SELLO
Diseño: mecánico tipo 21, lubricado por agua.
Material: cerámica parte estacionaria, anillo de
carbón y sello de exclusión parte rotatoria,
elastómero de Buna-N y resorte de acero
inoxidable.
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
 L3 DN D
G¼

DN S

226
H
111

L2 115 4-Ø11 150

L1 216
ESPECIFICACIONES

L1 L2 L3 H DN S DN D PESO
MODELO HP
PULGADAS ENTRADA SALIDA (kg)
CD70-1-2 1 14.2 4.4 2 8.7 G1¼" G1" 14
CD70-1.5-2 1.5 14.2 4.4 2 8.7 G1¼" G1" 14
CD70-2-2 2 15.7 4.4 2 9.1 G1¼" G1" 20
CD120-1.5-2 1.5 14.7 4.9 2.1 8.7 G1½" G1¼" 16
CD120-2-2 2 16.3 4.9 2.1 9.1 G1½" G1¼" 20
CD120-3-2 3 16.3 4.9 2.1 9.1 G1½" G1¼" 23
CD200-1.5-2 1.5 14.7 4.9 2.1 8.7 G1½" G1¼" 16
CD200-3-2 3 16.3 4.9 2.1 9.1 G1½" G1¼" 23

barmesa.com VISTA EXPLOSIONADA

8 10

16
1
2
4
11
6
15
13
5
9
3
7
14
12
10
8

ITEM DESCRIPCIÓN MATERIAL ITEM DESCRIPCIÓN MATERIAL

1 MOTOR 9 EMPAQUE "O" NBR
2 SELLO MECÁNICO CERÁMICA-CARBÓN 10 EMPAQUE "O" NBR
3 TORNILLO M6 x 15 INOX. 304 11 EMPAQUE "O" NBR
4 PLACA DE SELLO INOX. 304 12 TORNILLO M6 x 20 INOX. 304
5 DIFUSOR INOX. 304 13 TUERCA INOX. 304
6 IMPULSOR INOX. 304 14 BASE INOX. 304
7 CUERPO INOX. 304 15 ESPACIADOR INOX. 304
8 RESPIRADERO INOX. 304 16 SOPORTE NBR

Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.

D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote.
C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México
Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737
¡IMPORTANTE! Fax. 81.8331.1777 / 81.8351.9609
[email protected]
1. No utilice la bomba para bombear líquidos explosivos ni corrosivos. www.barmesa.com
 CURVAS DE RENDIMIENTO
Bomba Centrífuga en
Acero Inoxidable
Serie: CD

Rendimiento
H 0 20 40 60 80 100 Q[US.GPM] H
[m] [ft]

40
120
35

30 100

CD 70
25 80
CD 120
20
60
CD 200
15
40

barmesa.com
10
20
5

0 0
0 100 200 300 400 Q[1/min]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 Q[m3h]

MOTOR Q (1/min) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 200 250 300 330 350
MODELO
(kW) (HP) Q (m3 /h) 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6.0 7.2 8.4 9.6 12 15 18 20 21
CD70-1-2 0.75 1 25 23 21 17 15 10
CD70-1.5-2 1.1 1.5 33 31 29 25 21 15
CD70-2-2 1.5 2 40 38 36 32 27 22
CD120-1.5-2 1.1 1.5 20.5 20 19.5 19 18 17 14
H (m)
CD120-2-2 1.5 2 25.5 25 24.5 24 23 22 20
CD120-3-2 2.2 3 29 28.8 28.5 28 27.5 26 24
CD200-1.5-2 1.1 1.5 18.5 18 17.5 16.5 15 13 12 11
CD200-3-2 2.2 3 28.5 28 27.5 26.5 25 23 21.5 20.5

Prueba realizada con agua, gravedad específica 1.0 @ 20 °C (68 °F); otros líquidos pueden variar el rendimiento.

HOJA 1 DE 4
Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.
D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote. C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México | Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737 | [email protected] | www.barmesa.com
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
 CURVAS DE RENDIMIENTO
Bomba Centrífuga en
Acero Inoxidable
Modelos: CD70
H 0 10 20 30 40 Q[US.GPM] H
[m] [ft]
140
40
120
35

30 100

25 80
2 HP
20
60
15
1.5 HP
40
10 1 HP

20

barmesa.com
5

0 0
0 50 100 150 Q[1/min]
P2 P2
[HP] [kW]
2.2

1.6
2.0
2 HP
1.2
1.5 HP
1.0 0.8
1 HP
0.4
0.0 0.0
0 50 100 150 Q[1/min]
NPSH NPSH Eta
[ft] [m] [%]
8 40
20 6 30
1 HP 1.5 HP 2 HP
4 NPSH 20
10
2 10
0 0 0
0 50 100 150 Q[1/min]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Q[m3/h]

Prueba realizada con agua, gravedad específica 1.0 @ 20 °C (68 °F); otros líquidos pueden variar el rendimiento.

HOJA 2 DE 4
Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.
D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote. C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México | Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737 | [email protected] | www.barmesa.com
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
 CURVAS DE RENDIMIENTO
Bomba Centrífuga en
Acero Inoxidable
Modelos: CD120
H 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Q[US.GPM] H
[m] [ft]
120
35

30 100

25 80
3 HP

20 2 HP
60
15
1.5 HP
40
10

20
5

barmesa.com
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q[1/min]

P2 P2
[HP] [kW]
2.0
3 HP
1.6 2 HP
2.0
1.2
1.5 HP
1.0 0.8

0.4

0.0 0.0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q[1/min]

NPSH NPSH Eta

[ft] [m] [%]
12 60
10 50
30
8 1.5 HP 2 HP 3 HP 40
20 6 30
4 NPSH 20
10
2 10
0 0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Q[1/min]

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 Q[m3/h]

Prueba realizada con agua, gravedad específica 1.0 @ 20 °C (68 °F); otros líquidos pueden variar el rendimiento.

HOJA 3 DE 4
Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.
D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote. C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México | Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737 | [email protected] | www.barmesa.com
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
 BOMBA
CENTRÍFUGA
EN ACERO
INOXIDABLE
Serie SOX
1.5 - 50 HP *El kit de contrabridas ANSI
se ordena por separado

barmesa.com
SUCCIÓN ACOPLAMIENTO
2", 2½", 3" y 4" horizontal bridada 150 lb DIN. Hierro gris ASTM, clase 30.

DESCARGA
TORNILLERÍA
1¼", 1½", 2", 2½" y 3" vertical bridada 150 lb DIN.
Acero inoxidable 304.
TEMPERATURA MÁXIMA DEL LÍQUIDO
70 °C (158 °F); con sello para alta temperatura, se EMPAQUES
eleva a 104 °C (219 °F). Forma "O" de Buna-N.

MÁXIMA PRESIÓN DE TRABAJO

MANGA DE FLECHA
145 PSI (10.2 kg/cm²).
Acero inoxidable 316.
CUERPO
Acero inoxidable 304. MOTOR
Alta eficiencia, totalmente cerrado con ventilación
PLATO DEL SELLO exterior; 60 Hz, 3450 RPM, monofásico de 230 volts
Acero inoxidable 304.
y trifásico de 230/460 volts, aislamiento clase F.
Protección térmica incorporada en equipos
ESPECIFICACIONES

IMPULSOR
Diseño: tipo cerrado. monofásicos.
Material: acero inoxidable 304.
Requiere instalación de protección eléctrica por
SELLO sobrecarga.
Diseño: mecánico, lubricado por agua.
Material: carburo de silicio parte estacionaria,
anillo de carbón y sello de exclusión parte EQUIPAMIENTO OPCIONAL
rotatoria, elastómero de EPDM y resorte de acero Contrabridas con rosca NPT tipo DIN en acero
inoxidable. inoxidable 304. Incluye tornillería y empaques.
Actualizado: 09/03/2021
 4-ØS n 4-Ø18
SOPORTE
DEL MOTOR ØD2
ØK2
L1 L2 ØP2
F
k
a

n 4-Ø18
h2
h3 ØD1
ØK1
h
ØP1
E
h1
ESPECIFICACIONES

B m1 C D n1 4-Ø15
m2 n2
F
ØE

DIMENSIONES (mm)
MODELO HP TAMAÑO
E F H h1 h2 h3 a m1 m2 n1 n2 B C D S L1 L2 D1 k1 P1 D2 k2 P2 n
SOX1¼-1.5-2-1 1.5 2" x 1¼" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-1.5-2 1.5 2" x 1¼" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-2-2-1 2 2" x 1¼" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-2-2 2 2" x 1¼" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-3-2 3 2" x 1¼" 210 428 255 112 143 119 80 70 115 160 190 45 111 100 12 160 190 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-4-2 4 2" x 1¼" 300 460 340 160 180 119 80 70 118 190 240 45 109 100 12 160 190 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-5.5-2 5.5 2" x 1¼" 300 520 340 160 180 162 80 70 118 190 240 45 122 140 15 190 225 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1¼-7.5-2 7.5 2" x 1¼" 300 593 340 160 180 182 80 70 118 190 240 45 161 140 15 216 255 165 125 96 140 100 76 4
SOX1½-2-2-1 2 2½" x 1½" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 185 145 115 150 110 80 4

barmesa.com
SOX1½-2-2 2 2½" x 1½" 210 395 255 112 143 134 80 70 115 160 190 45 95 90 12 125 155 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-3-2-1 3 2½" x 1½" 210 425 255 112 143 119 80 70 115 160 190 45 111 100 12 160 190 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-3-2 3 2½" x 1½" 210 425 255 112 143 119 80 70 115 160 190 45 111 100 12 160 190 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-4-2 4 2½" x 1½" 250 460 292 132 160 119 80 70 118 190 240 45 111 100 12 160 190 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-5.5-2 5.5 2½" x 1½" 250 520 292 132 160 162 80 70 118 190 240 45 148 140 15 190 230 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-7.5-2 7.5 2½" x 1½" 300 615 360 160 200 182 100 70 118 212 264 65 161 140 15 216 255 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-10-2 10 2½" x 1½" 300 615 360 160 200 182 100 70 118 212 264 65 161 140 15 216 255 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX1½-15-2 15 2½" x 1½" 350 671 360 160 200 155 100 70 118 212 264 65 147 210 15 254 320 185 145 115 150 110 80 4
SOX2-4-2 4 2½" x 2" 250 455 292 132 160 119 80 70 115 190 240 45 110 100 12 160 190 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-5.5-2 5.5 2½" x 2" 250 520 292 132 160 162 80 70 115 190 240 45 148 140 15 190 230 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-7.5-2 7.5 2½" x 2" 300 615 360 160 200 182 100 70 118 212 264 65 161 140 15 216 255 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-10-2 10 2½" x 2" 300 615 360 160 200 182 100 70 118 212 264 65 161 140 15 216 255 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-12.5-2 12.5 2½" x 2" 300 617 360 160 200 182 100 70 118 212 264 65 161 140 15 216 255 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-15-2 15 2½" x 2" 350 671 360 160 200 255 100 70 118 212 264 65 147 210 15 254 320 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-20-2 20 2½" x 2" 350 671 360 160 200 255 100 70 118 212 264 65 147 210 15 254 320 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2-25-2 25 2½" x 2" 350 715 360 160 200 255 100 70 118 212 264 65 147 254 15 254 320 185 145 115 165 125 96 4
SOX2½-5.5-2 5.5 3" x 2½" 256 534 340 160 180 162 100 95 152 212 250 53 113 140 15 190 230 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-7.5-2 7.5 3" x 2½" 256 636 340 160 180 179 100 95 152 212 250 53 175 140 15 216 255 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-10-2 10 3" x 2½" 256 636 340 160 180 179 100 95 152 212 250 53 175 140 15 216 255 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-12.5-2 12.5 3" x 2½" 256 636 340 160 180 179 100 95 152 212 250 53 175 140 15 216 255 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-15-2 15 3" x 2½" 350 705 360 160 200 255 100 95 152 212 250 53 140 210 15 254 320 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-20-2 20 3" x 2½" 350 705 360 160 200 255 100 95 152 212 250 53 140 210 15 254 320 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-25-2 25 3" x 2½" 350 748 405 180 225 255 100 95 148 250 290 53 456 - 15 254 320 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-30-2 30 3" x 2½" 356 776 405 180 225 275 100 95 148 250 290 53 169 241 15 279 355 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX2½-40-2 40 3" x 2½" 400 844 425 200 225 308 100 95 148 250 290 53 177 305 19 318 386 200 160 132 185 145 115 4
SOX3-15-2 15 4" x 3" 350 725 405 180 225 255 125 95 176 250 290 78 452 140 15 254 320 220 180 152 200 160 132 8
SOX3-20-2 20 4" x 3" 350 725 405 180 225 255 125 95 176 250 290 78 452 140 15 254 320 220 180 152 200 160 132 8
SOX3-25-2 25 4" x 3" 350 769 405 180 225 255 125 95 176 250 290 78 452 - 15 254 320 220 180 152 200 160 132 8
SOX3-30-2 30 4" x 3" 356 811 430 180 250 275 125 95 176 280 320 78 180 241 15 279 355 220 180 152 200 160 132 8
SOX3-40-2 40 4" x 3" 400 880 450 200 250 308 125 95 176 280 320 78 188 305 19 318 386 220 180 152 200 160 132 8
SOX3-50-2 50 4" x 3" 400 880 450 200 250 308 125 95 176 280 320 78 188 305 19 318 386 220 180 152 200 160 132 8

Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.

D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote.
C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México
Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737
¡IMPORTANTE! Fax. 81.8331.1777 / 81.8351.9609
[email protected]
1. No utilice la bomba para bombear líquidos explosivos ni corrosivos. www.barmesa.com
 CURVAS DE RENDIMIENTO
Bomba Centrífuga en Acero
Inoxidable 304
Serie SOX

80

240 105
70
210 90
60 SOX1½ SOX2½
SOX2
180
75
50
150 SOX3

PSI
SOX1¼ 60
40
120
30 45
90

20 SOX3 30
60 SOX2½

barmesa.com
15
METROS

30 10
SOX1¼
PIES

0
LITROS
POR MINUTO 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500
GALONES 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
POR MINUTO

RANGO DE
CAUDAL NOMINAL RANGO DE OPERACIÓN
SERIE POTENCIA
HP LPS GPM LPS GPM
SOX1¼ 1.5 - 3 4 63 1-6 13 - 95
SOX1¼ 4 - 7.5 5 79 1-6 13 - 98
SOX1½ 2 - 15 7 111 1 - 10 21 - 159
SOX2 4 - 25 12 190 3 - 17 48 - 263
SOX2½ 5.5 - 12.5 24 380 11 - 33 171 - 528
SOX2½ 15 - 40 28 444 11 - 36 171 - 567
SOX3 15 - 25 38 602 17 - 55 263 - 872
SOX3 30 - 50 44 697 17 - 55 263 - 872

HOJA 1 DE 11
Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.
D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote. C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México | Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737 | [email protected] | www.barmesa.com
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
 CURVAS DE RENDIMIENTO
Bomba Centrífuga en Acero
Inoxidable 304
Serie SOX
80
SERIE: SOX1½
250 TAMAÑO: 2" x 1½" 105
15 HP RPM: 3500
70 60 Hz

90
200 60

10 HP
CARGA DINÁMICA

75
50 7.5 HP

150

5.5 HP 60

PSI
40

45
100 30

barmesa.com 20
30
METROS

50
PIES

15
LITROS
POR MINUTO 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
GALONES 50 100 150 200
POR MINUTO

CAPACIDAD

4
3
METROS

2 NPSH
1
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

80
5.5 HP
60 7.5 HP, 10 HP
% EFICIENCIA

40

20 15 HP

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

HOJA 5 DE 11
Barnes de México, S.A. de C.V.
D. Ladrón de Guevara 302 ote. C.P. 64500 Monterrey N.L. México | Tel. 81.8863.3737 / 81.8351.3737 | [email protected] | www.barmesa.com
Actualizado: 19/01/2021
INSTRUMENTOS Y ANALIZADORES

• Electroválvulas
• Switch de NIvel
• pH
• ORP
• Flujo
• Controladores
 Serie
1327 Válvulas a solenoide de 2 vías
Uso general.

Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.®

Consulte a fábrica por modelos disponibles

Aplicaciones:
•Instrumentación. Laboratorios.
•Quemadores pilotos de líquidos o gases combustibles.
•Equipos de soldadura. Humidificadores.
•Equipos dentales. Sistemas de vacío.
•Máquinas de lavado y de limpieza en seco.
Serie 1327 •Calefacción con vapor de baja o alta presión.

Peso aproximado: 0,5 Kg (1,1 Lb).

Características principales
Normalmente cerrada y normalmente abierta. Opcionales:
Acción directa. No necesita presión diferencial para operar. •Indicador luminoso de bobina energizada.
Conexiones roscadas 1/4” BSP o NPT. •Bobinas y carcasas a prueba de explosión y/o
Cuerpo de latón o acero inoxidable. intemperie.
Tubo de deslizamiento de AISI 304. •Operador manual.
Núcleo móvil y núcleo fijo de AISI 430FR.
Espira de sombra de cobre, plata o aluminio.
Bobinas capsuladas conexión ISO 4400 / EN 175301-803 (Ex
DIN 43650) Forma A.
Protección IP65 y NEMA 4x.ÿþ
Especificaciones técnicas - Cuerpo de Latón
Ø Factor de ∆p (a) Max. temp. y Nº de catálogo de acuerdo al material del asiento
orificio flujo maximo
Buna “N” Neoprene EPDM FKM PTFE
mm ins. Kv Cv bar psi
80 °C / 176 °F 80 °C / 176 °F 145 °C / 293 °F 150 °C / 302 °F 180 °C / 356 °F
Normalmente cerrada
1,25 ,049 0,05 0,06 * * 1327BA122 1327BN122 1327BE122 1327BV122 1327BT122
1,75 ,068 0,09 0,11 35 525 1327BA172 1327BN172 1327BE172 1327BV172 1327BT172
2,25 ,088 0,13 0,15 20 300 1327BA222 1327BN222 1327BE222 1327BV222 1327BT222
3,00 ,118 0,26 0,30 10 150 1327BA302 1327BN302 1327BE302 1327BV302 1327BT302
4,00 ,157 0,43 0,50 5 75 1327BA402 1327BN402 1327BE402 1327BV402 1327BT402
5,00 ,197 0,60 0,70 3 45 1327BA502 1327BN502 1327BE502 1327BV502 -
5,25 ,206 0,65 0,76 2,2 33 1327BA522 1327BN522 1327BE522 1327BV522 -
(a)Importante: cuando se use corriente continua (CC), la máxima presión * Con asiento de PTFE 100 bar/1500 psi. Otros asientos 70 bar/1050 psi.
ÿþ diferencial de operación se reduce en un 25% de la indicada en tabla.

Normalmente abierta
1,25 ,049 0,05 0,06 50** 750** 1327BA122NA 1327BN122NA 1327BE122NA 1327BV122NA 1327BT122INA
1,75 ,068 0,09 0,11 20** 300** 1327BA172NA 1327BN172NA 1327BE172NA 1327BV172NA 1327BT172INA
2,25 ,088 0,13 0,15 12** 180** 1327BA222NA 1327BN222NA 1327BE222NA 1327BV222NA 1327BT222INA
2,50 ,098 0,17 0,20 10 150 1327BA252NA 1327BN252NA 1327BE252NA 1327BV252NA -
3,00 ,118 0,26 0,30 10 150 1327BA302INA 1327BN302INA 1327BE302INA 1327BV302INA 1327BT302INA
4,00 ,157 0,43 0,50 5 75 1327BA402INA 1327BN402INA 1327BE402INA 1327BV402INA 1327BT402INA
** Con asiento de PTFE presión máxima 10bar / 150psi.

B-4
 Serie
1327 Válvulas a solenoide de 2 vías
Uso general.

Dimensiones generales 1327

B
E
C
F

R.W 3/16”
Pg9

INA/NA
NC

G
R 1/4”

VISTA E
D

NC NA INA B C D E F G NC NA INA B C D E F G
80 89 102 57 22 10 85 27 20 3,15 3,50 4 2,24 0,87 0,39 3,35 1,06 0,79
Dimensiones en mm Dimensiones en ins.

Construcciones especiales Opcionales Prefijo Sufijo Ejemplos

Cuerpo de acero inoxidable: Bobina a prueba de intempe-
rie, agua y corrosión salina. YC YC1327BA302
•AISI304: Cambiar B por S en el Nº de catálogo.
Ejemplo: 1327ST302. Bobina a prueba de explosión
e intemperie. ZC ZC1327BA302
•AISI316: Cambiar B por I en el Nº de catálogo.
Carcasa a prueba
Ejemplo: 1327IT302. de intemperie. Y Y1327BA302
Carcasa a prueba
de explosión e intemperie. Z Z1327BA302
Operador manual sobre
el orificio principal. (*) -M 1327BA302-M
Conexiones NPT. T 1327BA122T
Luz indicadora de Bobina energizada Ver Bobinas.

Datos de la bobina (*) Hasta 20 bar - 300 psi. No disponible con asiento de PTFE.
Ünicamente en versiones NC.
Tipo VA (volt-amper) Temperatura
Código Potencia máxima
de
corriente W Arranque Sosten. 0 C 0 F
Tensiones Recomendaciones para la instalación
MF11C 11 40 22 155 311 1
Colocación de un filtro delante de la válvula de
CA 50 Hz MH11C 11 40 22 180 356 1 porosidad ≤ de 100µ. Montaje en cualquier posición.
MF13C 13 45 27 155 311 2 La válvula admite que en algún momento haya una pre-
CA 60 Hz MH13C 13 45 27 180 356 2 sión mayor en la salida con respecto a la entrada pero
CC MH19C 19 19 19 180 356 3 no se garantiza su hermeticidad en esos casos, cuando
1-(12,24,110,220,240)V 2-(12,24,110,120,220,240)V 3-(12,24,110,220)V está cerrada.

Aplicaciones según el material del asiento.

Material
del asiento Buna “N” Neoprene EPDM FKM PTFE

Temperatura máxima +80 °C / 176 °F +80 °C / 176 °F +145 °C / 293 °F +150 °C / 302 °F +180 °C / 356 °F

Agua, aire, aceites Oxígeno, alcohol, Vapor de agua, agua Bencinas, naftas, Vapor de agua,
livianos. argón, otros gases y caliente, acetona. aromáticos, aceites calientes,
Usos Gases neutros. líquidos livianos no benceno, etc. fluidos corrosivos.
Querosene. corrosivos. Gases calientes.
Bajo y medio vacío. Freón 12 Alto vacío.
Gasoil

B-5
CABLE FLOAT LEVEL SWITCH

visit our website

PRODUCT INTRODUCTION

DESCRIPTION WORKING PRINCIPLE

The Float Level Switch is made from chemical The Cable Float Level Switch is a structured by
resistant polypropylene. It is durable, low-cost,and using either micro switches proximity switches or
specially designed to assist with long range and reed switches to control the contact. It’s user-friendly
multiple point level detection in liquids. It is also design is ideal for level measurement.
suitable for tanks containing pumps and granular The switches will transmit an ON or OFF contact
solutions. signal output when the float rises and turns
upwards. The switch contains a metal ball that can
APPLICATION slide as the float position changes.
For different water or solution temperatures, different
FAC: Suitable for pump controlled systems float materials are available for selection. Plastic and
FAR/ P / D/ E: Suitable for pump controlled waste water
stainless steel switches are the most common.
with a low Specific Gravity (SG level).
The cable float level switch can not only can be
FAS: High temperature solutions
FAL/ J: Cleaner water, and installation with smaller used in clear liquids but also can be used in
process connections. granular liquids. Long distance detection points and
It is suggested to apply Reed Switch contact models in multi-point contacts are also available.
PLC or DCS control. Cable float level switches can be applied in
all water management, petrochemical, chemical
industries. Other uses include: air-conditioner
systems, drainage systems, most tanks or
containers with level switch requirements.

FAP, FAR (CS)Series

FAC (CS)Series Angle 28BK2B FAL, FAM Series
Angle 28BK2B Angle 18BK4B
FAS (CF) Series
Angle 10BK2B
↑ON ↑ON
↑ON ↑NO

150~200mm
↓ OFF ↓NC

↓OFF
↓ OFF

1
SPECIFICATIONS

f9
Neoprene

f8 f9
PVC Neoprene

PP PP PP

Dimensions
110
(Unit:mm)
108 108

f90
f70 f70

17.5 40

Model FAC A/B/C Round type FAP A/B/C Cup type FAR A/B/C Cup type
Switch Micro switch Micro switch Micro switch
Float material P.P.

Cable spec Neoprene Cable PVC Cable Neoprene Cable

1mm2x3C or 2C 1.25mm2x3C or 2C 1mm2x3C or 2C
Contact rating 10A/ 250Vac (std.) or 15A/ 250Vac
Contact form N.O or N.C or SPDT
Operating temp. -10BC~80BC 0BC~60BC -10BC~80BC
Specific gravity 0.6 0.6 0.6
Weight approx. 770g/5M 290g/1M 290g/1M
2 2
Pressure 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm2
Wire voltage 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
Isolation resistance Min 100 MW Min 100 MW Min 100 MW
Contact resistance Max. 100mW Max. 100mW Max. 100mW
Actuation angle 28BA2B 28BA2B 28BA2B
Protection IP68 IP68 IP68

Float Type Code

FACA ...PP Float FAPA ...PP Float FARA ...PP Float

Cable length Cable length Cable length

x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M
03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M
05--- 5M 05--- 5M 05--- 5M
Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O
(Micro switch) B--- N.C (Micro switch) B--- N.C (Micro switch) B--- N.C
C--- SPDT C--- SPDT C--- SPDT
Cable material Cable material Cable material
C ---Neoprene P --- PVC R ---Neoprene
<HAR>HO7RN <HAR>HO7RN

2
SPECIFICATIONS

f6.8
f9 f8 10
Silicon
Neoprene PVC

PVC PVC SUS304

Dimensions
(Unit:mm)
108 108 120

f70 f70
f75

Model FAD A/B/C Round type FAE A/B/C Cup type FAS A/B/C Cup type
Switch Micro switch Micro switch Mercury switch
Float material PVC SUS304

Cable spec Neoprene Cable PVC Cable Silicon Cable

1mm2x3C or 2C 1.25mm2x3C or 2C 0.75mm2x3C or 2C
Contact rating 10A/ 250Vac (std.) or 15A/ 250Vac 1A/ 230Vac
Contact form N.O or N.C or SPDT N.O or N.C or SPDT
Operating temp. 0BC~60BC 0BC~60BC 0BC~170BC
Specific gravity 0.6 0.6 0.5
Weight approx. 290g/1M 290g/1M 480g/5M
2 2
Pressure 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm2
Wire voltage 600 Vac 600 Vac 300 Vac
Isolation resistance Min 100 MW Min 100 MW
Contact resistance Max. 100mW Max. 100mW Max. 1W
Actuation angle 28BA2B 28BA2B 10BA2B
Protection IP68 IP68 IP68

Float Type Code

FADA ...PVC Float FAEA ...PVC Float FASA ...SUS Float

Cable length Cable length Cable length

x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M
03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M
05--- 5M 05--- 5M 05--- 5M
Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O
(Micro switch) B--- N.C (Micro switch) B--- N.C (Micro switch) B--- N.C
C--- SPDT C--- SPDT C--- SPDT
Cable material Cable material Cable material
D --- Neoprene E --- PVC S --- Silicon

3
SPECIFICATIONS

f6 f6
PVC Neoprene

PP PP
Dimensions
(Unit:mm) 145 145

f29 f29

Model FAL A/B/C Bar type FAM A/B/C Bar type

Switch Micro switch
Float material P.P.

Cable spec PVC Cable Neoprene Cable

0.75mm2x3C 0.75mm2x3C
Contact rating 3A/ 125/250Vac
Contact mode N.O or N.C or SPDT
Operating temp. -0BC~60BC -10BC~80BC
Specific gravity 0.8
Weight approx. 113A2g/1M Cable
Pressure 4.5 kg/cm2
Wire voltage 600 Vac
Isolation resistance Min 100 MW
Contact resistance Max. 100mW
Actuation angle Up 18BA4B/ Down 3BA3B
Protection IP68

Float Type Code

FALA -(G) FAMA -(G)

Ground Ground
(Option) (Option)

Cable length Cable length

x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M
03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M
05--- 5M 05--- 5M

Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O

(Micro switch) B--- N.C (Micro switch) B--- N.C
C--- SPDT C--- SPDT

Cable material Cable material

J ---PVC M ---Neoprene

4
 SPECIFICATIONS

f6 f6
PVC Neoprene

PP PP
Dimensions
(Unit:mm) 145 145

f29 f29

Model FAJ A/B/C Bar type FAK A/B/C Bar type

Switch Reed Switch
Float material P.P.

Cable spec PVC Cable Neoprene Cable

0.75mm2x3C 0.75mm2x3C
Contact rating AC70 VA / DC50 W( N.O), 20W( N.C, SPDT)
Contact mode N.O or N.C or SPDT
Operating temp. -0BC~60BC -10BC~80BC
Specific gravity 0.8
Weight approx. 115A2g/1M Cable
Pressure 4.5 kg/cm2
Wire voltage 300 Vac/ 350Vdc(N.O), 150 Vac/ 200Vdc(N.C, SPDT)
Isolation resistance Min 100 MW
Contact resistance Max. 100mW( N.O) , Max. 150mW( N.C, SPDT)
Actuation angle Up 18BA4B/ Down 3BA3B
Protection IP68

Float Type Code

FAJA -(G) FAKA -(G)

Ground Ground
(Option) (Option)

Cable length Cable length

x6---0.6M 10--- 10M x6---0.6M 10--- 10M
03--- 3M Max. 20M 03--- 3M Max. 20M
05--- 5M 05--- 5M

Contact form A--- N.O Contact form A--- N.O

(reed switch) B--- N.C (reed switch) B--- N.C
C--- SPDT C--- SPDT

Cable material Cable material

J ---PVC K---Neoprene

5
WEIGHTS DIMENSIONS
FAPW-03 FASW FAB-0010
FAPW-05

f10 Model Material Weight

30 FAPW-03 0.3kg
PP
FAPW-05 0.5kg

70 123 106
65 FASW SUS304 1.8kg

FAB-0010 PP 0.15kg
f60 f65

CONTACT MODE f28

1. SPDT (N.O)
FACA FAPA/FAEA FARA/FADA FASA

N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.

ON
ON ON ON

BLUE BLACK BLUE YELLOW

BROWN WHITE BROWN BLUE

2. SPDT (N.C)
FACB FAPB/FAEB FARB/FADB FASB
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.

ON ON ON
ON
BLUE BLACK BLUE YELLOW
YELLOW RED YELLOW BROWN

3. SPDT (1C)
FACC FAPC/FAEC FARC/FADC FASC

SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT

BROWN WHITE BLUE YELLOW
BLUE BLACK BROWN ON BLUE
ON ON ON

ON BLUE ON BLACK ON BLUE YELLOW

YELLOW RED YELLOW ON BROWN

6
WIRING

Micro Switch Reed Switch

When the float hasn’t contacted the liquid, the When the liquid level is low, the metal ball
blue and black wires are in an open state and remains away from the sensing range and the
the contact mode will be NC. When the liquid brown and black wires are in an open state (NC
level rises and lifts the float until it reaches the mode). When the liquid level rises and lifts the
actuation angle, the brown and black wires will float until it reaches the actuation angle, the
be in an open state and the contact mode will brown and black wires will be in an open state
be NO. (NO mode).

(NO)Brown
(NO) (COM)
(NC) (COM)
Brown Black
Blue Black

(NC)
Blue (NO)
Brown 10cm(min)
10cm(min)

(COM)
Black

(NO)
Brown
(NC) (NC) (COM)
Blue Blue Black (NO) (COM)
Brown Black

(NO)
Brown
q1
q1

(COM)
Black

7
Installation guide

DIMENSIONS
The float’s action length (a) must be shorter than the The lowest float level (d) must be higher than the
distance between the wall and the cable (A) ; if not,it lowest water level of the pump (D).
will not function accurately.

Float lowest level

d
Lowest level of pump
D

PRECAUTIONS
Keep a proper distance between the installation There should be a proper distance between the
position and the water pump inlet to prevent the installation position and water inlet to prevent
float switch from being sucked in towards the pump. any direct water impact. If it can't be avoided,
please install a pipe-shield or plate that lowers
the turbulence.

8
APPLICATION

The FBB type is suitable for installation from the

tank’s roof/top for level control and monitoring.

POWER
SOURCE
R S T

NO FUSE BREAKER

Power
Switch
MAGNETIC SWITCH

HH High Alarm
Pump On
H

OL L
Low Alarm
U V W LL

MODEL: FBB(FLB)

HH(N.O.)
High Alarm

Pump On H(N.O.)

Pump Off L(N.O.)

LL(N.C.)
Low Alarm

9
HOW TO ORDER CABLE FLOATS (FB TYPE)

Various types of multi-point products can be FB ( )

selected to meet the user's needs.
Cable Fixed Wire Length (unit: mm)
0500: 500mm up
For example: 1000: 501~1000mm
1500: 1001~1500mm
FB-B type is suitable for corrosive solutions. ※ 500mm per Unit
※ Use English letter as first code for
FB-A type is suitable for high-temperature probe length over 10m.
waste water A150 represents 15m, A200
represents 20m

DISTANCE OF CONTROL POINTS Cable Fixed Wire Material

S: Stainless N: Nylon
Weight Quantity
1~4
NO NC Weight Material
1：ˍˍˍˍˍˍmm C: P.P. P: PPf28x106
S: SUS304
2：ˍˍˍˍˍˍmm Float Quantity
1~4
Float material
3：ˍˍˍˍˍˍmm
C: P.P. (f90x110 Neoprene cable) L : P.P. (f29x145 PVC cable)
P : P.P. (f70x108 PVC cable) M: P.P. (f29x145 Neoprene cable)
4：ˍˍˍˍˍˍmm R: P.P. ( f70x108 Neoprene cable) G : P.P. (f29x145 PVC cable)
S : SUS(f75x120 Silicon cable) H : P.P. (f29x145 Neoprene cable)
L：ˍˍˍˍˍˍmm D: PVC(f70x108 Neoprene cable) J : P.P. (f29x145 PVC cable)
E : PVC(f70x108 PVCcable) K : P.P. (f29x145 Neoprene cable)
Housing
A: Aluminum B: Plastic S: SUS304

MODEL: FBA (FLA) MODEL: FBB (FLB) MODEL: FBS (FLB)

f200 f185
f165 f150 f200
1/2"PF 1/2"PF f165 1/2"PF
2
Flange 4"x5kg/cm Flange 3"x10kg/cm2
Flange 4"x5kg/cm2
102 102
102

8-f19 8-f19
14 14
8-f19 14

(50mm)

L
(50mm)
Tie

f8.7mm cable

cable
fixed wire PP weight
(100mm)
FAPW
(CS-PP-W)

SUS weight (100mm)

65mm
FASW
(CF-SUS-W) f65mm

10
 [FC/FD] Mini Float/Magnetic Float Level Switch
[PB]
[FG] Magnetic Float Level Transmitter [LR]
[EA]
[FF] Side Mounting Float Switch
[EG] [EB] [FG] [JFR]
[FC/FD]
[FA/FB] Cable Float Level Switch [FA/FB] [EC]
[SB]
[SP] Thermal Dispersion Flow Switch [EB]
[EF]
[SF] Paddle Flow Switch [SC]
[SD] Optical Level Switch
[SA]
[SE] Rotary Paddle Level Switch
[SA] Capacitance Level Switch [FF]
[EC] Pressure Level Transmitter
[SF]
[LR] Loop Power Indicator
[SC] Vibrating Probe Level Switch
[SC] Tuning Fork Level Switch [SD] [FC/FD] [SP]
[EB] RF-Capacitance Level Transmitter
[SB] RF-Capacitance / Admittance Level Switch [EA] [PB/PM]
[EE]
[EG] Magnetostrictive Level Transmitter [SB] [SE] [JFR] [EB]
[SC]
[EF] By-Pass Level Transmitter [EB]

[MEF] Mini By-Pass Level Transmitter

[SA]
[EA] Ultrasonic Level Transmitter [SC]
[JFR] FMCW Radar Level Transmitter [SC]
[SE]
[EE] Electromechanical Level Measuring System
[ED] Speed Monitor [SB]
[SRT/SRS] Conveyer Belt Misalignment Switch &

Safety Cable Pull Switch

[PB/PM] Microprocessor Based Bargraphic Display Scaling Meter [BVK/
[BAS/ BVR/BVT]
[BRD/AE] Valve and Controller for Dust Collector System
BAH/BVP]
[BAS/BAH/BVP] Air Hammer
[BVK/BVR/BVT] Pneumatic Vibrator

FineTek Co., Ltd.

No.16, Tzuchiang St., Tucheng Industrial Park, New Taipei City 236, Taiwan.
TEL: 886 2 2269 6789 FAX: 886 2 2268 6682
Email: [email protected] http://www.fine-tek.com

Taichung Branch TEL: 886 4 2337 0825 FAX: 886 4 2337 0836
Tainan Branch TEL: 886 6 289 0635 FAX: 886 6 289 4073
Kaohsiung Branch TEL: 886 7 333 6968 FAX: 886 7 536 8758

Fine automation (ShangHai) Co., Ltd.

No.451 DuHui Rd, MinHang District, Shanghai, China 201109
TEL: 86 21 6490 7260 FAX: 86 21 6490 7276
Email: [email protected]

FineTek Pte Ltd.

No. 60 Kaki Bukit Place, #07-06 Eunos Techpark 2
Lobby B, Singapore 415979
Distributor:
TEL: 65 6452 6340 FAX: 65 6734 1878
Email: [email protected]

FineTeK GmbH
Frankfurter Str. 62, OG D-65428 Ruesselsehim, Germany
TEL: 49 6142 17608 0 FAX: 49 6142 17608 20
E-Mail: [email protected]

Aplus Finetek Sensor inc.

355 S. Lemon Ave, Suite D, Walnut, CA 91789
Tel : 1 909 598 2488 Fax : 1 909 598 3188
Email: [email protected] 08-FA-B0-EP, 04/15/2013
Signet 2724-2726 pH/ORP Electrodes
General Purpose

Compatible with ALL Signet pH/ORP instruments Features

and SmartPro transmitters
• Patented reference design for exceptional
performance and prolonged life in harsh
environments*

• Memory chip enabled for access to a wide

range of unique features when connected to the
Signet 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics

• Ryton® (PPS) body for broad range of chemical

compatibility

• Patented DryLoc® connector with gold plated

contacts

• Special design allows for installation at any

angle, even inverted or horizontal
Fl
Flat Protected
P d
Bulb • ¾” NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 threaded sensors
for use with reducing tees DN15 to DN100
(½ to 4 in.)

The Signet 2724-2726 pH and ORP electrodes are • Mounts in Signet standard fittings from
general purpose sensors ideal for a wide range of DN15 to DN100 (½ to 4 in.)
applications. These feature a patented reference
design and uses the unique foul-proof patented DryLoc® • Quick temperature response
connector. The large area PE reference junction and
pathway is constructed to increase the total reference
• Bulb and flat HF resistant glass available
effectiveness and ensures long service life.
for trace HF, in less than 2% concentration
The DryLoc® connector with corrosion resistant gold applications
plated contacts readily connects the sensor to the
mating 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics or • Low conductivity sensor available for liquids down
the 2760 Preamplifier. The robust Ryton® threaded to 20 μS/cm
sensor body and choice of flat pH, bulb pH, or flat ORP
sensing elements allows a broad range of chemical
and mechanical compatibility for a wide variety of
applications.

There are two optional pH sensing versions available, HF

and LC. The HF version is for applications where traces Applications
of hydrofluoric acid (2% or less) will attack standard pH
glass. The LC version can be used for low conductivity • Water & Wastewater Treatment
fluids 20 - 100 μS/cm nominal and below 20 μS when • Neutralization Systems
mounted under controlled conditions.
• Effluent Monitoring
The quick temperature response is available in either • Sanitization Systems
a Pt1000 or 3 KΩ temperature sensor and allows • Pool & Spa Control
compatibility with all Signet pH/ORP instruments. The • Aquatic Animal Life Support Systems
2724-2726 electrodes incorporate ¾ inch NPT or ISO
7/1-R 3/4 threads for installing into standard pipe-tees. • Process Control
They can also be mounted directly into Signet standard • Cooling Towers
fittings, DN15 to DN100 (½ to 4 inch).

*U.S. Patent Nos.: 6,666,701, 7,799,193 B2,

7,867,371 B2 and 8,211,282 B2
Specifications

General
Performance Efficiency >97% @ 25 °C (77 ° F)
Operating Range pH 0 to 14 pH
ORP ±2000 mV
3-2726-LC Low conductivity fluids; 20 - 100 μS/cm nominal < 20 μS; flow must
be less than 150 ml/min in a properly grounded system
3-2724-HF, 3-2726-HF Hydrofluoric acid resistant glass, pH 6 or below; trace HF <2%
Compatibility
2751 Smart Sensor Electronics (for 8900, 9900, 9950, 4 to 20 mA or Profibus Concentrator),
2760 Preamplifier
Temperature Sensor
Pt1000 versions Compatible with Signet 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics for
connection to a PLC or to the Signet 8900, 9900 or 9950 instruments
3 KΩ Balco versions Compatible with Signet 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics or with
Signet 2760 pH/ORP Preamplifier for connection to the
Signet 8750 pH/ORP Transmitter
Process Connection
¾ in. NPT ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Mounts into Signet fittings
Wetted Materials
pH Ryton® (PPS), glass, UHMW PE, FKM
ORP Ryton® (PPS), glass, UHMW PE, FKM, Platinum
Max. Temperature/Pressure Rating
Operating Temperature Range* -10 °C to 85 °C 14 °F to 185 °F
Operating Pressure Range 6.8 bar @ -10 to 65 °C (100 psi @ 14 to 150 °F)
4 bar @ 65 to 85 °C (58 psi @ 150 to 185 °F)
*Best performance for 2724-HF, 2726-HF sensors is above 10 °C (50 °F)
Recommended Storage Temperature
0 °C to 50 °C 32 °F to 122 °F
The electrode glass will shatter if shipped or stored at temperature below 0 °C (32 °F)
The performance life of the electrode will shorten if stored at temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F)
Mounting
In-line Mounting Use the sensor threads
Use a Signet standard fitting up to 4 in.
Sensor can be mounted at any angle
Submersible Mounting Use threads on models 2751 or 2760
Requires ¾ inch NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 male threaded liquid tight extension conduit.
Shipping Weight
0.25 kg 0.55 lb
Standards and Approvals
RoHS compliant, China RoHS
Manufactured under ISO 9001 for Quality, ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and
OHSAS 18001 for Occupational Health and Safety

See Temperature and Pressure graphs for more information

www.gfsignet.com
Dimensions

109 mm
(4.3 in.)
Threads:
0.64 mm ¾ in. NPT
or
(0.25 in.) ISO 7/1 R-3/4

44.45 mm 53.34 mm
(1.75 in.) (2.1 in.)
25.4 mm
(1.0 in.)

9.3 mm
(0.37 in.)
18.3 mm
(0.72 in.)

*Yes
90°
Yes Yes NO
Mounting Angle
NO NO
Models 2724-2726 may be mounted at any angle
without affecting the performance.
*Avoid locations with air pockets and sediment 0° 180° 0°
Horizontal
When mounting in standard threaded fittings the YES YES
electrode must be mounted horizontally to 60
degrees below horizontal position only. Yes Yes NO
270°
*Yes 240° 300°

Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall 4 to 20 mA Output Automation System

Signet Instruments Signet Instruments 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics with 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics with
with 2751 Smart Sensor with 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics - Customer Supplied Chart Recorder - 0486 Profibus Concentrator and
Electronics - 9900 and Rear Enclosure or Programmable Logic Controller or Customer Supplied Programmable Logic
- 8900 - Programmable Automation Controller Controller or
- 9900 - Programmable Automation Controller
- 9950

ENTER
N/C

L OUT-

L OUT+

N/C

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

+ +
Profibus USB Out In S 3L Loop S 3L Loop

+ +
Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5
Valve

PLC
PLC Address Signet 3-0486 Profibus Concentrator

Power Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

24 VDC
0.40A Max SL 3
Freq SL 3
Freq SL 3
Freq SL 3
Freq
+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT
Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN
PWR+

PWR+

PWR+

PWR-

PWR-

PWR-

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA
GND

GND

GND

GND

Signet 2724-2726
DryLoc® pH/ORP
Electrodes

All sold separately

In-Line Installation - Submersible Installation -

Signet and threaded 1/2 in to 4 in Customer supplied pipe extension
fittings only or conduit with 3/4 in. NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 threads

www.gfsignet.com
Electrode Key Features and Benefits:
5

1. Ryton® body for chemical compatibility with most 1 6

harsh chemicals.
2. Porous UHMW PE (ultra high molecular weight
polyethylene) junction resists fouling and build-up.
3. Memory chip enabled for convenient data storage
and access (calibration data, operational data, and
manufacturing data), electrode health monitoring
via glass impedance measurement when used in 4
7

connection with the 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor

Electronics.
4. Internal temperature sensor located in the glass
stem for a quick temperature response.
5. DryLoc® connector with corrosion resistant gold 2
plated pins for quick and easy sensor removal. Dual-patented reference design
Resists moisture and dirt intrusion. for long life in conductivity or
6. Dual-patented reference design with a 406 mm chemicals.
(16 in.) reference pathway for prolonged life in
harsh environments. This enables the sensor to last
significantly longer than other standard pH/ORP
electrodes in most applications.
6a. With the patented reference design, the Sensor in
Signet 2726-LC version performs better in low threaded
conductivity water between 20 - 100 μS and lasts reducing tee
longer than previous “DI” electrodes.
6b. The 2726-LC sensor also performs in
applications with extremely low (less than 20 μS)
conductivity. Special precautions must be taken to
avoid measurement complications.
Please note the following.
• Electrostatic charges (streaming potentials)
can cause dramatic offsets in a system with
very low conductivity water. To minimize this,
sensors should be placed in a well grounded
system.
• To enhance performance, a low flow cell is
recommended to provide a steady flow rate
(150 ml/minute). Sensors placed in high flow
applications will experience noisier readings
due to streaming potential.
7. Threads for NPT or ISO process connection into
reducing tees
• Use off-the-shelf GF reducing tees
DN20 to DN100 (¾ to 4 in.).
8. Mounts directly into Signet fittings (½ to 4 in.)
for easy sensor retrofitting. 8 Sensor in Signet fitting
9. Mount submersed into a tank via the 2751 or
2760 back threads.

9 Sensor submersible installation

www.gfsignet.com
Temperature/Pressure Graph

Note:
The pressure/temperature graphs are specifically
for the Signet sensor. During system design the (psi) (bar)

specifications of all components must be considered. 150 10.3

In the case of a metal piping system, a plastic sensor
will reduce the system specification. 125 8.6

100 6.9

75 5.2

50 3.4

25 1.7

0
°C -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
°F -40 -4 32 68 104 140 176 212 248

Application Tips Model 2724-2726 Ordering Notes

• Use the flat glass electrodes when a self-cleaning 1) pH and ORP electrodes require connection to
feature is desired; especially useful in applications model 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics or
with abrasive chemicals for in-line installations. 2760 Preamplifier.
• Use bulb protected electrodes for low temperature 2) The 2751 “EasyCal” feature recognizes common
applications or where fast response is required. pH and ORP buffer values of 4, 7 and 10 pH and
• ORP electrodes are generally used for chemical +87, +264 and +469 mV for ORP.
reaction monitoring, not control.
• Ensure that sensor materials are chemically
compatible with the process liquid.
• Keep electrode tip wet, avoid air pockets and
sediment.

Buffer Solutions Quinhydrone

3822-7004 3822-7115 The Signet pH buffers are ideal for calibration.
3822-7007 The liquid solutions are conveniently packaged in one
3822-7010 pint (473 ml) bottles. pH buffer kits in powder pillows
are available for mixing fresh solutions with water at
the time of use.

All pH buffers are color coded for easy identification;

4.01 pH is red, 7.00 pH is yellow, and 10.00 pH is blue.
All pH buffers are traceable to NIST standards.
The 4.01 and 7.00 pH buffer solutions can be used
to calibrate ORP sensors when saturated with
quinhydrone.

www.gfsignet.com
Ordering Information
Mfr. Part No. Code Tip Design Process Connection Thread Options
pH Electrodes
Temperature Element Pt1000; use with 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics* and Profibus Concentrator
3-2724-00 159 001 545 Flat ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2724-01 159 001 546 Flat ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-00 159 001 553 Bulb ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2726-01 159 001 554 Bulb ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-HF-00 159 001 549 Bulb, HF Resistant¹ ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2726-HF-01 159 001 550 Bulb, HF Resistant¹ ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-LC-00 159 001 557 Bulb, Low Conductivity² ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2726-LC-01 159 001 558 Bulb, Low Conductivity² ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
Temperature Element 3 KΩ Balco; Compatible with both the 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics* and the
2760 Preamplifier**
3-2724-10 159 001 547 Flat ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2724-11 159 001 548 Flat ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2724-HF-10 159 001 771 Flat, HF Resistant¹ 3/4 in. NPT, Thread
3-2724-HF-11 159 001 772 Flat, pH Resistant¹ ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-10 159 001 555 Bulb ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2726-11 159 001 556 Bulb ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-HF-10 159 001 551 Bulb HF Resistant1 ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
1
3-2726-HF-11 159 001 552 Bulb HF Resistant ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
3-2726-LC-10 159 001 559 Bulb, Low Conductivity2 ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
3-2726-LC-11 159 001 560 Bulb, Low Conductivity2 ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
ORP Electrodes; Compatible with both the 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics* and the
2760 Preamplifier**
3-2725-60 159 001 561 Platinum, Flat, 10 KΩ ID, ¾ ¾ in. MNPT, Thread
in. NPT
3-2725-61 159 001 562 Platinum, Flat, 10 KΩ ID, ISO 7/1-R 3/4 Thread
ISO 7/1 R¾
*The 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics has a digital (S3L) output which is used with 8900, 9900 or
9950 instruments, and the Profibus Concentrator.
It also has a 4 to 20 mA output for connections to PLC’s, data recorders, etc.
**The 2760 Preamplifier is used for connection directly to 8750 transmitter or other analog transmitters.
1
HF resistant ‹2%HF
²Low conductivity applications, 20 - 100 μS/cm recommended

Note:
The 3 KΩ Balco temperature element electrodes are compatible with the 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor
Electronics, 8900, 9900 and 9950 instruments.

Accessories and Replacement Parts

Mfr. Part No. Code Description
1220-0021 198 801 000 O-ring, FKM (2 required per sensor)
3-2700.395 159 001 605 Calibration Kit: includes 3 polypropylene cups, box used as cup stand,
1 pint pH 4.01, 1 pint pH 7.00
3822-7115 159 001 606 20 gm Bottle Quinhydrone for ORP Calibration (must use pH 4.01 and/or
pH 7.00 buffer solutions)
3-2759 159 000 762 pH/ORP System Tester (adapter cable sold separately)
3-2759.391 159 000 764 2759 DryLoc Adapter Cable (for use with 2751 and 2760)
3-0700.390 198 864 403 pH Buffer Kit (1 each 4, 7, 10 pH buffer in powder form, makes 50 ml of each)
3822-7004 159 001 581 pH 4.01 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3822-7007 159 001 582 pH 7.00 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3822-7010 159 001 583 pH 10.00 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3800-5000 159 838 107 3.0M KCl Storage Solution for pH and ORP, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3-2700.397 159 001 870 Protective Cap for pH/ORP Electrodes, 5 pieces
3-2700.398 159 001 886 O-ring Lubricant Kit (5 packs of Super Lube, 1cc each)
3-2724.099 Rev K (03/20)
© Georg Fischer Signet LLC
3401 Aero Jet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 • www.gfsignet.com • e-mail: signet.ps@georgfischer.com
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. All corporate names and trademarks stated herein are the property of their respective companies.
Signet 2751 DryLoc® pH/ORP Smart Sensor
Electronics

Features
• Probe health monitoring, glass impedance and
broken glass detection

• Memory chip interface that allows for

transferable calibration, runtime data, and
manufacturing information

In-line In-line EasyCal Submersible • In-line integral mount and submersible

2751-1 2751-2 2751-3 or 2751-4 installation versions

DryLoc® Electrodes sold separately • Automatic temperature compensation

The Signet 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics • Auto configuration for pH or ORP operation
featuring the DryLoc® connector, is the solution for
field-free calibration, out of range glass impedance and • Optional EasyCal calibration aid with automatic
broken glass detection, alerting the operator to probe
failure or maintenance needs. pH buffer recognition for 4, 7 and 10 pH and ORP
solutions: quinhydrone saturated pH 4 or
The 2751 features two different outputs: a two-wire 7 buffers and Light's Solution +469 mV
4 to 20 mA loop output with optional EasyCal function
or a digital (S3L) output which allows for longer cable • Junction boxes for convenient wiring
lengths and is compatible with all Signet 8900, 9900
and 9950* instruments or in blind, 4 to 20 mA.
• Patented DryLoc® connector provides a quick
The pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics will allow and secure connection to the sensor**
for calibration of electrodes in a laboratory setting
and installation of pre-calibrated probes in the field,
reducing system downtime. Memory chip enabled
electrodes will store operational data such as minimum
and maximum pH/mV readings, runtime, minimum and
C
FM
maximum temperature (pH only), for troubleshooting US
APPROVED
and operational evaluation. To take full advantage of E171559
all features and benefits of the 2751, use with Signet
9900 (Generation IV or later), 9950 Transmitter or 0486
Profibus Concentrator. Applications
The 2751 self-configures for pH or ORP operation via
automatic recognition of the electrode type. The optional • Water and Wastewater Treatment
EasyCal feature allows simple push-button calibration • Neutralization Systems
and includes an LED indicator for visual feedback.
• Scrubber Control
The 2751 submersible pH/ORP Smart Sensor • Effluent Monitoring
Electronics can also be used in-line when used with
• Surface Finishing
the 3/4” or 1” threaded sensors including the 272X,
273X, 275X, 276X and 277X series of electrodes. The • Flocculent Coagulation
2751 in-line sensor electronics can be used with Signet • Heavy Metal Removal and Recovery
fittings up to DN100 (4 in.) and Wet-Tap assemblies.
• Toxics Destruction
• Sanitization Systems
• Pool & Spa Control
• Aquatic Animal Life Support Systems

*Users of 9950 Gen I and 9950 (Gen 2a) should update to 9950 (Gen 2b
or later) to take full advantage of the 2751 features and benefits.
Visit www.gfsignet.com for the latest software update. **U.S. Patent No.: 6,666,701
Specifications
General
Compatible Electrodes
Signet DryLoc® pH and ORP Electrodes, Models 2724-2726, 2734-2736, 2756-2757 Wet-Tap, 2764-2767, 2774-2777
Operating Range pH -1 to 15 pH
ORP ±2000 mV
Response Time pH < 6 sec. for 95% of change
ORP Application dependent
Materials In-line PBT (thermal plastic polyester) and polypropylene (retaining nut)
Submersible CPVC
Electrical
Cable 4.6 m 15 ft 3-conductor shielded (3-2751-1 in-line and the 3-2751-3 or -4 submersible
sensor electronics only) See ordering information for additional cable sizes
22 AWG For 9900, 9950 and 4 to 20 mA max. cable length is 305 m (1,000 ft.).
For 8900, please refer to the Cable Calculation Table of the Signet catalog for
max. cable length.
Power 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, regulated for 4 to 20 mA output
5 to 6.5 VDC ±5% regulated recommended, 3 mA max., for digital (S3L) output
Current Output pH Fixed 4 to 20 mA, isolated, = 0 to 14 pH (custom scaling available with
0252 tool)
ORP Fixed 4 to 20 mA, isolated, = -1000 to +2000 mV (custom scaling available
from ± 2000 mV with 0252 tool)
Max. Loop Resistance 100 Ω max. @ 12 V 325 Ω max. @ 18 V 600 Ω max. @ 24 V
Accuracy ±32 µA
Resolution ±5 µA
Update Rate 0.5 seconds
Error Indication 3.6 mA, 22 mA, or none
Digital (S3L) Output Serial ASCII, TTL level 9600 bps
Accuracy pH ± 0.02 pH @ 25 °C ± 0.02 pH @ 77 °F
ORP ± 1.5 mV @ 25 ° C ± 1.5 mV @ 77 °F
Temperature ≤ 0.4 °C 0.72 °F
Resolution pH ≤ 0.01 pH
ORP 1.5 mV
Update Rate 0.5 seconds
Available Data Raw mV, pH or ORP, Temperature (pH), Glass Impedance (pH), Minimum mV (pH), Maximum mV
(pH), Minimum Temperature (pH), Maximum Temperature (pH), Model Number, Serial Number,
Manufacturing Date, Runtime, Slope pH/mV, Measurement Offset, and Temperature
Error Indication Open input diagnostic, broken glass detection (pH), High Impedance
Input Impedance, Z >1011Ω
Environmental
Enclosure 3-2751-1 & -2 NEMA 4X/IP65 with electrode connected
3-2751-3 & -4 NEMA 6P/IP68 with electrode and watertight conduit and/or extension
pipe connected
Maximum Temperature/Pressure Rating
Operating Temperature
Submersible 0 °C to 85 °C 32 °F to 185 °F
In-line 0 °C to 85 °C 32 °F to 185 °F
Storage Temperature -20 °C to 85 °C -4 °F to 185 °F
Relative Humidity 0 to 95%, non-condensing (without electrode connected)
Shipping Weight (based on 4.6 m (15 ft) cable lengths)
2751-2 0.75 kg 1.65 lb
2751-1, -3 & -4 0.64 kg 1.41 lb
Standards and Approvals
CE, FCC
RoHS compliant, China RoHS
Manufactured under ISO 9001 for Quality and ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and
OHSAS 18001 for Occupational Health and Safety
www.gfsignet.com
Dimensions
3-2751-1 3-2751-2 3-2751-3, -4
35.0 mm
(1.38 in.)
94 mm
(3.7 in.)

35.05 mm
(1.38 in.)
3/4 in. ISO or
3/4 FNPT threads

140 mm
(5.5 in.)
1/2 in. FNPT

115.8 mm 102 mm
(4.56 in.) (4.02 in.)

22.09 mm
(0.87 in.)

61.0 mm 56.6 mm
(2.40 in.) (2.23 in.)

2751 Product Selection Guide

1. Choose the 2724-2726, 2734-2736 2764-2767 Differential 2774-2777 2756 and 2757
Electrode ORP electrodes Wet-Tap
Can use Any 3-2764-1 must have 10K ID Can use any
3-272X or 273X 3-2764-2 resistor use: Wet-Tap 275X
series electrode 3-2766-1 3-2775, 3-2777 series
3-2766-2 electrode
pH electrodes can
be either the 1K or
3K use:
3-2774, 3-2774-1,
3-2776, 3-2776-1

2. Determine the
mounting style:

In-line
2751-1 2751-1 2751-3 2751-1 2751-3 2751-1 2751-3 2751-1 or -2
or -2 or -2 or -4 or -2 or -4 or -2 or -4
And

-In-line fitting

Or ½” to 4” ¾” 1” ¾”
Signet fitting reducing tee threaded tee reducing tee

Submersible 3719 Wet-Tap

2751-3 or -4
Assembly
and cable conduit (customer supplied)
connected to ¾” sensor electronics
+ (Submersible not
applicable with
Wet-Tap assembly)

3. Junction Boxes 3-8050-1: Use when extending the submersible cable over long distance.
3-8050-2: Use with the submersible 2751-3 or -4 and the in-line 2751-1
for best calibration results with the EasyCal function when using the
blind 4 to 20 mA output.

4. Choose the output

instrument 1 2 3 4
N/C

L OUT-

L OUT+

N/C

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

OR
PLC
Profibus USB Out In S3L Loop S3L Loop

Digital (S L)
³
Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5
Valve

Address Signet 3-0486 Profibus Concentrator

Power Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

24 VDC
0.40A Max S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq

Or
+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT
Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN
PWR+

PWR+

PWR+

PWR-

PWR-

PWR-

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA
GND

GND

GND

GND

ENTER

4 to 20 mA 9900 or 9950 Instruments, Profibus Concentrator PLCs or Chart Recorders

www.gfsignet.com
System Overview
In-Line Installation
Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount 4 to 20 mA Output Automation System
Signet Instruments Signet Instruments Signet 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics with - 0486 Profibus Concentrator and
- 8900 - 9900 and Rear Enclosure - Customer Supplied Chart Recorder - Customer Supplied Programmable
- 9900 or Programmable Logic Controller or Logic Controller or
- 9950 - Programmable Automation Controller - Programmable Automation Controller

N/C

L OUT-

L OUT+

N/C

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+
+
Profibus USB Out In S3L Loop S3L Loop
Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5

PLC
Valve

PLC

OR Address Signet 3-0486 Profibus Concentrator

Power Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

24 VDC
0.40A Max S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT
Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN
ENTER

PWR+

PWR+

PWR+

PWR-

PWR-

PWR-

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA
GND

GND

GND

GND
Signet 2751 Smart Signet 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics Signet 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics
Sensor Electronics with Signet 3-8050-2 Universal Junction Box (EasyCal)

Signet Electrodes
- 2724-2726
- 2734-2736
- 2764-2767
- 2774-2777

2724-2726 and 2734-2736 DryLoc Electrodes: Use GF fittings* or customer supplied 3/4 in. NPT fittings
2764-2767 and 2774-2777 DryLoc Electrodes: Use customer supplied 3/4 in. or 1 in. NPT fittings All sold separately

Submersible Installation Wet-Tap Installation

Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount 4 to 20 mA Output Automation System
Signet Instruments Signet Instruments Signet 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics with - 0486 Profibus Concentrator and
- 8900 - 9900 and Rear Enclosure - Customer Supplied Chart Recorder - Customer Supplied Programmable
- 9900 or Programmable Logic Controller or Logic Controller or
- 9950 - Programmable Automation Controller - Programmable Automation Controller

PLC

OR
N/C

L OUT-

L OUT+

N/C

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

+
Profibus USB Out In S3L Loop S3L Loop
Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5

PLC
Valve

ENTER

Address Signet 3-0486 Profibus Concentrator

Power Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

24 VDC
0.40A Max S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq S3L Freq
+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT
Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN
PWR+

PWR+

PWR+

PWR-

PWR-

PWR-

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA
GND

GND

GND

GND

Signet 2751 Smart Signet 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics

Sensor Electronics with Signet Wet-Tap Electrode 2756, 2757 and Signet 3719 Wet-Tap
with customer supplied pipe extension
or conduit, 3/4 in. NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4
threads**

+ +
+
Signet Electrodes GF Tees and Fittings
2724-2726 see model 3719 for more info
2734-2736
2764-2767
2774-2777

All sold separately

* See fittings section for more information.

**Refer to the Signet Submersion Kit brochure (3-0000.707) located on our website for installation suggestions and options.

www.gfsignet.com
Model 2751 Ordering Information

1) Model 2751 requires 12 to 24 VDC to function as a 5) All sensor electronics, preamplifiers and
blind 4 to 20 mA output transmitter. connectors require a DryLoc electrode for full
system installation.
2) Order a 3-2751-2 or any other 2751 with a junction
box 3-8050-2 if the EasyCal feature is desired. 6) The 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics
is compatible with all Signet 8900, 9900 and
3) Conduit and mounting brackets for submersion 9950 instruments. To take full advantage of
installation must always be used (customer the advanced features use the 9900 SmartPro
supplied). Transmitters (Generation IV or greater), 9950 and
0486 Profibus Concentrator.
4) The 3-2759 System Tester must be ordered with
the adapter cable 3-2759.391 for exclusive use with
the 2751.

Application Tips

• The EasyCal feature automatically recognizes

standard 4.0, 7.0, and 10.0 pH buffer or ORP
quinhydrone solutions of +87 and +264 mV or
Light's Solution, +469 mV, and simplifies calibration.
For EasyCal ORP only single point calibration is used.

• Frequency of calibration of electrodes is dependent

upon the application.

9900 pH/ORP Calibrator ( 150 399 007)

The 9900 battery operated calibrator is built to enhance

the user experience with the new line of 2751 Smart pH/
ORP sensor electronics. This unit can be kept in a lab or
taken in to the field. The calibration storage capability of
the pH/ORP electrodes when used with the 2751 Smart
sensor electronics, allows the user the ability to rotate
electrodes, meaning unplug an aged/dirty electrode
replacing with a pre-calibrated electrode.

With larger installations, all collected dirty and

uncalibrated electrodes can be taken to a central
well organized location where proper cleaning and
calibration can be performed. This improves efficiency
of this process resulting more stable readings, higher
sensitivity, faster response time, and overall more
accurate readings. Runs on (8) AA Alkaline batteries
(included).

www.gfsignet.com
Ordering Information
Mfr. Part No. Code Description
In-line pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics (yellow body)
3-2751-1 159 001 804 with 4.6 m (15 ft) cable, recommended for 9900 or 9950 instruments
3-2751-1-025 159 070 110 with 7.6 m (25 ft) cable, recommended for 9900 or 9950 instruments
3-2751-1-050 159 070 111 with 15.2 m (50 ft) cable, recommended for 9900 or 9950 instruments
3-2751-1-100 159 070 112 with 30.5 m (100 ft) cable, recommended for 9900 or 9950 instruments
3-2751-2 159 001 805 with junction box and EasyCal, recommended for 4 to 20 mA use
Submersible pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics (gray body)
with 4.6 m (15 ft) cable and ¾ in. NPT threads - when 4 to 20 mA is required use
3-2751-3 159 001 806
the 3-8050-2 junction box with EasyCal
with 7.6 m (25 ft) cable and ¾ in. NPT threads - when 4 to 20 mA is required use
3-2751-3-025 159 070 113
the 3-8050-2 junction box with EasyCal
with 15.2 m (50 ft) cable and ¾ in. NPT threads - when 4 to 20 mA is required use
3-2751-3-050 159 070 114
the 3-8050-2 junction box with EasyCal
with 30.5 m (100 ft) cable and ¾ in. NPT threads - when 4 to 20 mA is required
3-2751-3-100 159 070 115
use the 3-8050-2 junction box with EasyCal
with 4.6 m (15 ft) cable and ISO 7/1-R 3/4 threads - when 4 to 20 mA is required
3-2751-4 159 001 807
use the 3-8050-2 junction box with EasyCal

Sensor Electronics with preamplified signal and digital (S3L) output (for use with the SmartPro Instruments) or
4 to 20 mA output - power supplied to unit dictates output type.

Note:
The 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics is compatible with 8900, 9900 and 9950 SmartPro Transmitters, and
Signet 0486 Profibus Concentrator. To take full advantage of the 2751 features, use 9900 (Generation IV or later),
9950 or 0486 Profibus Concentrator.

Accessories and Replacement Parts

Mfr. Part No. Code Description
Calibration
3-2700.395 159 001 605 Calibration Kit: includes 3 polyproplyene cups, box used as cup stand, 1 pint pH 4.01, 1 pint pH 7.00
3822-7115 159 001 606 20 gm Bottle Quinhydrone for ORP calibration (must use pH 4.01 and/or pH 7.00 buffer solutions)
3-2759 159 000 762 pH/ORP System Tester (adapter cable sold separately)
3-2759.391 159 000 764 2759 Adapter Cable for use with 2751 DryLoc Sensor Electronics
3-0700.390 198 864 403 pH Buffer kit (1 each 4, 7, 10 pH buffer in powder form, makes 50 ml of each)
3822-7004 159 001 581 pH 4 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3822-7007 159 001 582 pH 7 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
3822-7010 159 001 583 pH 10 Buffer Solution, 1 pint (473 ml) bottle
Mounting
3-8050.390-3 159 310 116 Retaining Nut Replacement Kit, Black Polypropylene
3-8050-1 159 000 753 Universal Mount Junction Box
3-8050-2 159 000 754 Universal Mount Junction Box w/EasyCal (for submersible applications, use with
3-2751-3 and -4 where 4 to 20 mA is required)
3-9000.392-1 159 000 839 Liquid Tight Connector Kit, NPT (1 connector)
3-9000.392-2 159 000 841 Liquid Tight Connector Kit, PG 13.5 (1 connector)
Other
5523-0322 159 000 761 Sensor Cable (per ft), 3-cond. plus shield, 22 AWG, black/red/white (for use with 2751)
P31515-0P200 159 000 630 Universal Pipe Adapter PVC
P31515-0C200 159 000 631 Universal Pipe Adapter CPVC
P31515-0V200 159 000 459 Universal Pipe Adapter PVDF
7310-1024 159 873 004 24 VDC Power Supply, 10W, 0.42 A
7310-2024 159 873 005 24 VDC Power Supply, 24W, 1.0 A
7310-4024 159 873 006 24 VDC Power Supply, 40W, 1.7 A
7310-6024 159 873 007 24 VDC Power Supply, 60W, 2.5 A
7310-7024 159 873 008 24 VDC Power Supply, 96W, 4.0 A
3-2700.398 159 001 886 O-ring Lubricant Kit (5 packs of Super Lube, 1cc each)
3-2751.099 Rev E (05/20)
© Georg Fischer Signet LLC
3401 Aero Jet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 • www.gfsignet.com • e-mail: [email protected]
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. All corporate names and trademarks stated herein are the property of their respective companies.
Signet 9950 Dual Channel Transmitter

Member of the SmartPro® Family of Instruments

Features
• One instrument for multiple sensor types

• Multiple language support for Simplified Chinese,

English, French, German and Spanish

• Two different sensor types can be combined in

one instrument

• Configurable display

• Derived measurements

• Advanced boolean logic

• Single and Dual Channel Direct Conductivity/

Resistivity Modules
The 9950 Transmitter is a two channel controller that supports • Two passive, 4 to 20 mA current loop outputs
two sensors of same or different types in one instrument. The in base unit, four additional current loops via
sensor types supported by the 9950 are Signet Flow, pH/ORP, optional modules
Conductivity/Resistivity, Salinity, Temperature, Pressure, Level,
Dissolved Oxygen, and devices that transmit a 4 to 20 mA signal • Optional Dual Channel, passive 4 to 20 mA
with the use of the 8058 iGo® Signal Converter. Current Loop Module for 2 or 4 additional
The 9950 includes advanced features such as derived functions, loop outputs
advanced multiple relay modes, and timer based relay functions.
Derived function allows for the control of a relay or current loop • USB Port for Field Upgrades using standard USB
with the sum, delta (difference), or ratio of two measurements, Flash Drive
for example delta pressure and delta temperature. Multiple relay
modes allow up to three signals to be used for the control of a • Modbus Module for connections to Serial RS485
single relay. This can be any combination of analog and binary automation networks
inputs. The timer relay modes allow a relay to be activated on
a repeating basis from every minute to once every 30 days.
Weekday timer mode allows a relay to be energized on a specific
day or days of the week at a specific time. C
FM
US
MEASURING EQUIPMENT
E171559
APPROVED
The 3-9950.393-3 Relay Module includes the ability to interface up E171559

to four binary inputs. The binary inputs are compatible with either
open collector or mechanical contacts. The binary inputs can
supply power to the four inputs or accepts powered outputs from
Applications
external devices. These inputs can be used with level switches, • Wastewater Treatment
flow switches, pressure switches or other devices. The inputs can • Reverse Osmosis
be used to directly control the relays of the 9950 or can be used in • Deionization
combination with the measurement readings for advanced control
• Chemical Manufacturing/Addition
of your process.
• Metal and Plastic Finishing
The 9950 supports the following relay modules: • Fume Scrubber
• Four Channel Mechanical Relay Module • Cooling Towers
• Two Mechanical and Two Solid State Relay Module • Media Filtration
• Chemical Dosing/Injection
• Two Mechanical Relays and Four Binary Inputs Module
• Aquatic Life Support
The 9950 supports single or dual channel direct conductivity • Pools & Fountains
modules for conductivity, resistivity or salinity measurements. • Rinse Tanks
A dual channel 4 to 20 mA passive output module is available. • Chemical Neutralization
This will allow expansion from a base of 2 current loop outputs to
a maximum of 6 current loop outputs in a single transmitter.
The 9950 Modbus Module allows for remote access to
measurements, derived functions, state of current loop outputs
and relays over a serial RS485 Modbus automation network.
Specifications
General
Input Channels Two frequency or S3L inputs, or optional direct conductivity modules, maximum of 2 channels
Enclosure and Display
Case Material PBT
Window Shatter-resistant glass
Keypad 4 buttons, injection-molded silicone rubber seal
Display Dot matrix, LCD
Indicators Two horizontal digital bar graphs, four LED relay status indicators
Update Rate 1s
LCD Contrast 5 settings
Size ¼ DIN
Mounting
Panel ¼ DIN, ribbed on four sides for panel mounting clip inside panel, silicon gasket included
Wall Wall Mount enclosure (sold as an accessory)
Terminal Blocks
Pluggable Screw Type Use minimum 105 °C rated wire
Torque Ratings
Power/Loop 0.49 Nm (4.4 lb-in.)
Freq/S L3
0.49 Nm (4.4 lb-in.)
Relay Module 0.49 Nm (4.4 lb-in.)
Connector Wire Gauge
Power, Loop 12 to 28 AWG
Freq/S L3
16 to 28 AWG
Relay Module Connector Wire Gauge
Relay 12 to 28 AWG
Environmental
Ambient Operating Temperature
DC Power -10 °C to 70 °C 14 °F to 158 °F
AC Power -10 °C to 60 °C 14 °F to 140 °F
Storage Temp -15 °C to 70 °C 5 °F to 158 °F
Relative Humidity 0 to 100% condensing for (front only); 0 to 95% non-condensing (rear panel)
Maximum Altitude 4,000 m (13,123 ft)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X/IP65 (front face only)
Performance Specifications
System Accuracy Primarily dependent upon the sensor
System Response Primarily dependent upon the sensor. Controller adds a maximum of 150 ms processing delay to the
sensor electronics.
Minimum update period is 100 ms
System response is tempered by the display rate, output averaging and sensitivity feature

Raw Conductivity/Resistivity input directly from Signet Conductivity/Resistivity electrodes via Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module
or via 2850

www.gfsignet.com
Specifications (continued)
Electrical Requirements
Power to Sensors
Voltage +4.9 to 5.5 VDC @ 25 °C, regulated
Current 30 mA Maximum
Short Circuit Protected
Isolation Low voltage (< 48 V AC/DC)
Power Requirements
DC (3-9950-1, 3-9950-2)  4 VDC nominal (12 to 32 VDC, ±10% regulated), UL 60950-1 or UL 61010-1
2
Power Supply rated for operation at 4000 m altitude
AC (3-9950-2) 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 24 VA
Maximum current 200 mA (without optional relay module)*
500 mA (with optional relay module)*
*The current draw of the other modules and the sensors are minimal
Current Loop 12 to 32 VDC, ±10% regulated, 4 to 20 mA (30 mA max.)
Overvoltage protection 48 Volt Transient Protection Device (for DC ONLY)
Current limiting for circuit protection
Reverse-Voltage protection
Input Types
Digital (S3L) or AC frequency
4 to 20 mA input via the 8058 iGo Signal Converter
Open collector
pH/ORP input via the Digital (S3L) output from the 2750 pH/ORP Sensor Electronics or 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor
Electronics
Conductivity/Resistivity via the Digital (S3L) output from the Direct Conductivity Module or 2850 Conductivity/Resistivity
Sensor Electronics
Sensor Types Flow, pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity, Pressure, Temperature, Level/Volume, Salinity,
Dissolved Oxygen, Other (4 to 20 mA)
Sensor Input Specifications
Digital (S3L) Serial ASCII, TTL level, 9600 bps
Frequency Flow Sensors 0.5 to 1500 Hz
Sensitivity 80 mV @ 5 Hz, gradually increasing with frequency to 2.5 V
(for coil type sensors)
Freq. Range 0.5 Hz to 1500 Hz @ TTL level input or open collector
(for square wave type sensors)
K-Factor Range 0.0001 to 9999999
Accuracy ± 0.5% of reading max error @ 25 °C
Resolution 1 µs
Repeatability ± 0.2% of reading
Power Supply
Rejection No Effect ± 1 µA per volt
Short Circuit Protected
Reverse Polarity Protected
Update Rate (1/frequency) + 100 ms
Direct Conductivity Module - 3-9950.394-1 and 3-9950.394-2
Accuracy Conductivity +/- 2% of Reading
Temperature 0.5 °C
Resolution Conductivity 0.1% of Reading
Temperature <0.2 °C
Update Rate 2.5 Seconds Single Channel, 5 Seconds Dual Channel
Compatible Electrodes All GF Signet Sensors

www.gfsignet.com
Specifications (continued)
Binary Input (3-9950.393-3)
Input Voltage Range (without damage) -5 VDC to 30 VDC (No operation below 0 VDC)
Maximum Current Rating 6.0 mA
Maximum Voltage Rating 30 VDC
Maximum Input Voltage 1.5 VDC
for signal “Off” (low or “0”)
Minimum Input Voltage 3.0 VDC
for signal “On” (high or “1”)
Maximum Current Draw for Signal “0” (low) ≤ 500 µA DC
Minimum Current Draw for Signal “1” (high) 500 µA
Typical Current Draw for Signal “1” (high) 6.0 mA at 30 VDC, 4.8 mA at 24 VDC, 2.4 mA at 12 VDC, 1.0 mA at 5 VDC
Current Loop Specifications
Current Loop Out ANSI-ISA 50.00.01 Class H (Passive, external voltage required)
Voltage 12 to 32 VDC, ±10% regulated, UL 60950-1 or UL 61010-1 Power Supply rated for
operation at 4000 m altitude
Maximum Impedance 250 Ω @ 12 VDC 500 Ω @ 18 VDC 750 Ω @ 24 VDC
Span 3.8 to 21 mA
Accuracy ± 32 µA max. error @ 25 °C @ 24 VDC
Resolution 6 µA or better
Temp. Drift ± 1 µA per °C
Isolation Low voltage (< 48 VAC/DC)
Update Rate 100 mS nominal
Zero 4.0 mA factory set; user programmable from 3.8 to 5.0 mA
Full Scale 20.0 mA factory set; user programmable from 19.0 to 21.0 mA
Power Supply Rejection ± 1 µA per V
Actual Update Rate Determined by Sensor Type
Short Circuit and Reverse Polarity Protected
Adjustable Span, Reversible
Error Condition Selectable error condition 3.6 or 22 mA or None
Test Mode Increment to desired current (range 3.8 to 21.00 mA)
Analog Outputs  Passive 4 to 20 mA Outputs in Base Unit or 2 or 4 passive current loops by
2
optional module(s)
Relay Specifications
Dry Contact Relays (3-9950.393-1, 3-9950.393-2, and 3-9950.393-3)
Type SPDT
Form C
Maximum Voltage Rating 30 VDC or 250 VAC
Maximum Current Rating 5 A resistive
Solid State Relays (3-9950.393-2)
Type SPDT
Form C
Maximum Voltage Rating 30 VDC or 30 VAC
Maximum Current Rating 0.050 A resistive
Hysteresis Adjustable (absolute in Engineering Units)
On Delay 9999.9 seconds (max)
Cycle Delay 99999 seconds (max)
Test Mode Set On or Off
Maximum Pulse Rate 0 to 300 pulses/minute
Proportional Pulse 0 to 300 pulses/minute
Volumetric Pulse Width 0.1 to 3200 s
PWM Period 0.1 to 320 s
www.gfsignet.com
Specifications (continued)
Display Ranges
pH -1.00 to 15.00 pH
pH Temperature -99 °C to 350 °C -146 °F to 662 °F
ORP -1999 to +1999.9 mV
Flow Rate -9999 to 99999 units per second, minute, hour or day
Totalizer 0.00 to 99999999 units
Conductivity 0.0000 to 99999 µS, mS, PPM and PPB (TDS), kΩ, MΩ
Conductivity Temperature -99 °C to +350 °C -146 °F to 662 °F
Temperature -99 °C to +350 °C -146 °F to 662 °F
Pressure -40 to 1000 psi
Level -9999 to +99999 m, cm, ft, in, %
Volume 0 to 99999 cm3, m3, in3, ft3, gal, L, lb, kg, %
Salinity 0 to 100 PPT
Dissolved Oxygen 0 to 50 mg/L, 0 to 200%
Shipping Weights
Base Unit 0.63 kg 1.38 lb
Relay Module 0.19 kg 0.41 lb
Single Channel Module 0.075 kg 0.16 lb
Dual Channel Module 0.075 kg 0.16 lb
Modbus Module 0.075 kg 0.16 lb
Standards and Approvals
CE, UL, CUL, FCC
RoHS Compliant, China RoHS
Manufactured under ISO 9001, ISO 14001, and ISO 45001

Dimensions
90.73 mm
99.06 mm (3.57 in.)
(3.90 in.) 82.60 mm
(3.25 in.)

1 2 3 4

91.44 mm
99.06 mm (3.60 in.)
(3.90 in.)

ENTER

102.37 mm
(4.03 in.) 91.44 mm
(3.60 in.)

Graphical User Interface created with emWin licensed by SEGGER

www.gfsignet.com
 Relay 1 Backlight Sensor Relay 3
Indicator LED (do not block) Indicator LED
Relay 2 Relay 4
Indicator LED Indicator LED

Channel 1
Numeric
Values
CH1 UOM Units of Measure

UOM
display area or labels (GPM, pH, sec, %, etc.)

Bar Graph

Numeric
Values
CH2 UOM
Channel 2 Units of Measure
display area or labels
UOM (GPM, pH, sec, %, etc.)

Bar Graph

Menu Navigation Keys

ENTER

Freq Digital (S3L) Requires

The 9950 is compatible with all GF Signet products Sensor Model
Output Output 8058
listed in the column to the right.
515/8510 X
• pH and ORP electrodes require the Signet 2750 525 X
or 2751 DryLoc® Sensor Electronics 2000 X
(sold separately). 2100 X
2250 X
• Conductivity/Resistivity or measurement requires 2350 X
the Signet 2850 Conductivity/Resistivity sensor
2450 X
electronics (sold separately).
2507 X
2536/8512 X
2537-5 X
2540 X
2551 X X
2552 X X
2580 X X
U1000 X X
U3000 X X
U4000 X X
2260 X
2270 X
2290 X
2291 X
2610-51 X
2724-2726 X
2734-2736 X
2750, 2751 X
2756-2757 X
2764-2767 X
2774-2777 X
2819-2823 X
2839-2842 X
2850 X

www.gfsignet.com
Binary Input compatible sensors. For use with
3-9950.393-3 Relay Module

Sensor Model Binary Input

2280 X
2281 X
2282 X
2284 X
2285 X

System Overview
Panel or Wall Mount Automation System
Signet Model 9950 Transmitter Signet Model 9950 Transmitter with Modbus Module
(Includes mounting bracket and panel gasket) and
- PLC (Customer supplied)

+ +
PLC

Signet Sensors - Flow, Level, Temperature, Pressure, DO Other Level with 8058 iGo Converter
Use one input from sensor options below plus other 4 to 20 mA

FLOW

+
515 8510 525 U1000 2000 2100 2507 2537 2540 2551 2552 2580 2250 2350 2450 2610 U3000/4000 2270 2260 2290 2291 8058-1 iGo Converter
2536 8512

Signet Sensors - pH/ORP Signet Wet-Tap Electrode Model 2756, 2757 and 3719 Wet-Tap with
Use one input from sensor options below 2750 or 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics
with 2750 or 2751 pH/ORP Smart Sensor Electronics

+
+

Signet Sensors - Conductivity/Resistivity and Salinity Electrodes

Use one input from electrode options belowwith Conductivity Module or 2850 Sensor Electronics

+ or

Signet Fittings - See individual sensor data sheets All Sold Separately

www.gfsignet.com
Ordering Information
Mfr. Part No Code Description
9950 Base Unit - Dual Channel, Multi-Parameter, AC Power and DC Power
4

3-9950-1 159 001 841 9950 Base Unit – Two Channel Multi-Parameter Inputs,
Two 4 to 20 mA Outputs, Panel Mount, DC Power
ENTER
3-9950-2 159 001 842 9950 Base Unit – Two Channel Multi-Parameter Inputs,
Two 4 to 20 mA Outputs, Panel Mount, AC or DC Power
Optional Accessory Modules
3-9950.393-1 159 310 268 Relay Module with 4 Mechanical Relays
3-9950.393-2 159 310 269 Relay Module with 2 Mechanical and 2 Solid State Relays
3-9950.393-3 159 310 270 Relay Module with 2 Mechanical Relays and 4 Binary Inputs
3-9950.394-1 159 001 846 Single Channel Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module
3-9950.394-2 159 001 847 Dual Channel Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module
3-9950.395-M 159 001 905 Modbus Module
3-9950.398-2 159 001 848 Dual Channel 4 to 20 mA Current Loop Output Module

Accessories and Replacement Parts

Mfr. Part No Code Description

3-5000.399 198 840 224 5 x 5 inch Retrofit Adapter
3-8050.392 159 000 640 CR200 ¼ DIN Retrofit Adapter
3-8050.396 159 000 617 RC Filter Kit (for relay use), 2 per kit
3-5000.399 3-8058-1 159 000 966 i-Go® Signal Converter, wire-mount
3-9950.391 159 310 278 Connector Kit, In-Line, 9950 Transmitter
3-9950.392 159 310 279 Relay Module Connector Kit, 9950 Transmitter
3-9900.392 159 001 700 Wall Mount Enclosure Kit
3-9000.392-1 159 000 839 Liquid Tight Connector Kit, NPT (1 pc.)
3-8050.392

3-9900.392

3-9950.099 Rev G (06/20)

© Georg Fischer Signet LLC
3401 Aero Jet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 • www.gfsignet.com • e-mail: [email protected]
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. All corporate names and trademarks stated herein are the property of their respective companies.
Signet 2536 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors

Features
• Operating range 0.1 to 6 m/s (0.3 to 20 ft/s)

• Wide turndown ratio of 66:1

• Open-collector output

• Highly repeatable output

• Simple, economical design

• Installs into pipe sizes DN15 to DN900

PVC Standard Integral Wet-Tap (½ to 36 in.)
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
(gray body (blue cap) • PVC 2536 version DN15 to DN100 (½ to 4 in.)
and cap)
for concentrated Sodium Hypochlorite
12.5% applications

• High resolution and noise immunity

Simple to install with time-honored reliable • Test certificate included for -X0, -X1
performance, Signet 2536 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow
Sensors are highly repeatable, rugged sensors that • Chemically resistant materials
offer exceptional value with little or no maintenance.
The Model 2536 has a process-ready open collector
signal with a wide dynamic flow range of 0.1 to 6 m/s
(0.3 to 20 ft/s). The sensor measures liquid flow rates in
full pipes and can be used in low pressure systems. C
FM
US
APPROVED
E171559
The Signet 2536 sensors are offered in a variety of
materials for a wide range of pipe sizes and insertion (3-2536-PX
configurations. The many material choices including version only)
PP and PVDF make this model highly versatile and
chemically compatible to many liquid process solutions.
Applications

Sensors can be installed in DN15 to DN900 (½ to 36 in.) • Pure Water Production

pipes (except the 2536 PVC versions, which can be • Filtration Systems
installed in DN15 to DN100 (½ to 4 in.) pipes), using • Chemical Production
Signet’s comprehensive line of custom fittings. These • Liquid Delivery Systems
custom fittings, which include tees, saddles, and • Pump Protection
weldolets, seat the sensor to the proper insertion depth • Scrubber/Gas Stacks
into the process flow. The sensors are also offered in • Gravity Feed Lines
configurations for wet-tap installation requirements. • Not suitable for gas
• Sodium Hypochlorite transfer/
injection/batching (3-2536-U0)

www.gfsignet.com
Specifications
General
Operating Range 0.1 to 6 m/s 0.3 to 20 ft/s
Pipe Size Range DN15 to DN900 ½ to 36 in.
PVC DN15 to DN100 ½ to 4 in.
Linearity ±1% of max. range @ 25 °C (77 °F)
Repeatability ±0.5% of max. range @ 25 °C (77 °F)
Min. Reynolds Number Required 4500
Wetted Materials
Sensor Body Glass-filled PP (black), PVDF (natural) or PVC (gray)
O-rings FKM (std) optional EPR (EPDM) or FFKM
Rotor Pin Titanium, Hastelloy-C or PVDF; optional Ceramic, Tantalum or Stainless Steel
Rotor Black PVDF or Natural PVDF; optional ETFE, with or w/o carbon fiber reinforced PTFE
sleeve for rotor pin
Electrical
Frequency 49 Hz per m/s nominal 15 Hz per ft/s nominal
Supply Voltage 5 to 24 VDC ±10%, regulated
Supply Current <1.5 mA @ 3.3 to 6 VDC <20 mA @ 6 to 24 VDC
Output Type Open collector, sinking 10 mA max.
Cable Type 2-conductor twisted pair with shield, 22 AWG
Cable Length 7.6 m (25 ft) can be extended up to 305 m (1000 ft) maximum
Max. Temperature/Pressure Rating - Standard and Integral Sensor
PP 12.5 bar @ 20 °C 180 psi @ 68 °F
1.7 bar @ 85 °C 25 psi @185°F
PVDF 14 bar @ 20 °C 200 psi @ 68 °F
1.7 bar @ 85 °C 25 psi @ 185 °F
PVC 12.5 bar @ 20 °C 180 psi @ 68 °F
6.9 bar @ 60 °C 100 psi @ 140 °F
Operating Temperature
PP -18 °C to 85 °C 0 °F to 185 °F
PVDF -18 °C to 85 °C 0 °F to 185 °F
PVC 0 °C to 50 °C 32 °F to 122 °F
Max. Temperature/Pressure Rating - Wet-Tap Sensor
PP 7 bar @ 20 °C 100 psi @ 68 °F
1.4 bar @ 60 °C 20 psi @ 140 °F
Operating Temperature -18 °C to 60 °C 0 °F to 140 °F
Max. Wet-Tap Sensor Removal 1.7 bar @ 22 °C 25 psi @ 72 °F
Rating
Shipping Weight
3-2536-X0 0.454 kg 1.00 lb
3-2536-X1 0.476 kg 1.05 lb
3-2536-X2 0.680 kg 1.50 lb
3-2536-X3 0.780 kg 1.72 lb
3-2536-X4 0.800 kg 1.76 lb
3-2536-X5 0.880 kg 1.94 lb
3-8512-X0 0.35 kg 0.77 lb
3-8512-X1 0.37 kg 0.81 lb
Standards and Approvals
CE, FCC, NSF (3-2536-PX only)
RoHS compliant, China RoHS
Manufactured under ISO 9001 for Quality and ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and
OHSAS 18001 for Occupational Health and Safety

See Temperature and Pressure Graphs for more information

www.gfsignet.com
Dimensions

Standard Mount Integral Mount Wet-Tap Mount Sensor

(shown with Transmitter with 3519 Wet-Tap Valve
PVC Mount sold separately) (See 3519 product page for
(0.5 to 4 in. pipe range only) more information).

96 mm 99.06 mm
(3.8 in.) (3.90 in.)

53.3 mm 102 mm 106 mm

(2.1 in.) (4.0 in.) (4.16 in.)
-P3
-X0 -Y0 or -Y1
thru -Y0 or -Y1 thru
26.7 mm -P5
-X2
(1.05 in.)
26.7 mm 26.7 mm
(1.05 in.) (1.05 in.) 26.7 mm
(1.05 in.)

Pipe Range
½ to 4 in. -P3 = 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Pipe range Pipe range Pipe range 5 to 8 in. -P4 = 333 mm (13.1 in.)
10 in. and up -P5 = 409 mm (16.1 in.)
0.5 to 4 in. -X0 = 104 mm (4.1 in.) 0.5 to 4 in. -Y0 = 152 mm (6.0 in.) 0.5 to 4 in. -P3 = 297 mm (11.7 in.)
5 to 8 in. -X1 = 137 mm (5.4 in.) 5 to 8 in. -Y1 = 185 mm (7.3 in.) 5 to 8 in. -P4 = 333 mm (13.1 in.)
10 in. and up -X2 = 213 mm (8.4 in.) 10 in. and up -P5 = 409 mm (16.1 in.)

System Overviews
Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount Field (Integral) Mount Automation System
Signet Instruments Signet Instruments Signet Instruments - 0486 Profibus Concentrator
- 8900 - 9900-1P with Rear Enclosure - 9900-1 with 3-8051-X and Customer Supplied
- 9900 - 9900-1BC with Rear Enclosure Integral Mount Kit Programmable Logic Controller or
- 9900-1BC - 9900 with 3-8050-1 Universal - Programmable Automation Controll
- 9950 Mount Kit or 3-8052-1 Integral
Mount Kit +
- 9950 with 3-8050-1 Universal
Mount Kit or 3-8052-1 Integral

N/C

L OUT-

L OUT+

N/C

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+

GND

DATA

+5V OUT

L IN-

L IN+
+ +
Profibus USB Out In S3L Loop S3L Loop
ENTER
Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5

PLC
Mount Kit
Valve

OR
Address Signet 3-0486 Profibus Concentrator

Power Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

24 VDC
0.40A Max S3L Freq S3L Freq S3 L Freq S3L Freq

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT

+5V OUT
Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN

Freq IN
PWR+

PWR+

PWR+

PWR-

PWR-

PWR-

DATA

DATA

DATA

DATA
GND

GND

GND

GND
1 2 3 4

+ OR
+
ENTER

Signet 2536
PVC, Standard,
Wet-Tap or
8512 Integral
Mount
Flow Sensors

Signet Fittings

All sold separately

For overview of Wet-Tap System, see 3519 product page

Application Tips

• Use the Conduit Adapter Kit to protect the • Sensor plug can be used to plug installation fitting
cable-to-sensor connection when used in outdoor after extraction of sensor from pipe.
environments. See Accessories section for more • For liquids containing ferrous particles, use Signet
information. Magmeters.
• Use a sleeved rotor in abrasive liquids to • For systems with components of more than one
reduce wear. material, the maximum temperature/pressure
specification must always be referenced to the
component with the lowest rating.

www.gfsignet.com
Temperature/Pressure Graphs
2536 & 2537*
(psi) (bar)
Note:
210 14.5
The pressure/temperature graphs are specifically
200 13.8
for the Signet sensor. During system design the
190 13.1
specifications of all components must be considered. In
180 12.4
the case of a metal piping system, a plastic sensor will

Pol
170 11.7
reduce the system specification. When using a PVDF

ypr
160 11.0

PVD
sensor in a PVC piping system, the fitting will reduce the

opy
150 10.3
system specification.

F
len
140 9.7

e
130 9.0
120 8.3
110 7.6
100 6.9
90 6.2
80 5.5
70 4.8
60 4.1
50 3.4

PVC
40 2.8
30 2.1
20 1.4
10 .7
0
°C -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
°F -4 32 68 104 140 176 212
*2537 Only: Graph applies to sensor wetted materials only.
Maximum ambient temperature is 65°C.

Ordering Notes

1) Most common part number combinations shown. 2) Other rotor and pin materials are available for
For all other combinations contact factory. purchase from the factory and can be easily replaced
in the field. See Accessories section.

Ordering Information
Model 2536 Standard Mount Paddlewheel
When choosing this style of sensor, the instrument can be mounted nearby on a pipe or wall or in a remote
location up to 305 m (1000 ft) by connecting the sensor through a standard 3-8050-1 universal junction box.
Standard cable length is 7.6 m (25 ft). Use Signet fittings for proper seating of the sensor into the process flow.

Mfr. Part No. Code Body Rotor Pin Material

Flow Sensor for use with remote mount instrument
DN15 to DN100 - ½ to 4 in.
3-2536-P0 198 840 143 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
3-2536-T0 198 840 149 Natural PVDF Natural PVDF Natural PVDF
3-2536-U0 159 001 843 PVC Sleeved ETFE Titanium
3-2536-V0 198 840 146 Natural PVDF Natural PVDF Hastelloy-C
DN125 to DN 200 - 5 to 8 in.
3-2536-P1 198 840 144 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
3-2536-V1 198 840 147 Natural PVDF Natural PVDF Hastelloy-C
DN250 to DN900 - 10 to 36 in.
3-2536-P2 198 840 145 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium

www.gfsignet.com
Ordering Information (continued)
Model 2536 Integral Mount Paddlewheel
When choosing this style of sensor, the instrument is mounted directly onto the sensor for a local display.
See guidelines below for instructions.

Mfr. Part No. Code Body Rotor Pin Material

Flow sensor for integral mounting on the 8150 instrument using the 3-8051-X Flow Sensor Integral
Mount Kit (sold separately)
DN15 to DN100 - ½ to 4 in.
3-8512-P0 198 864 513 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
3-8512-T0 198 864 518 Natural PVDF** Natural PVDF Natural PVDF
3-8512-V0 198 864 516 Natural PVDF** Natural PVDF Hastelloy-C
DN125 to DN200 - 5 to 8 in. (PP only)
3-8512-P1 198 864 514 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
**Natural PVDF available ½ in. to 4 in. only

Guidelines: Combining a 2536 integral mount flow sensor with an integrally mounted instrument
Once an integral mount sensor is chosen, it can be
mounted directly to a field mount transmitter by
following these guidelines:

a) Order the 3-8051-X flow sensor integral mounting kit

(sold separately) to connect the sensor to
an instrument.
b) Order a field mount transmitter (sold separately).
The following part numbers are compatible:
3-9900-1.

Model 2536 Wet-Tap Mount Paddlewheel Flow Sensor

When choosing this style of sensor, the instrument can be mounted nearby on a pipe or wall or in a remote
location up to 305 m (1000 ft) by connecting the sensor through a standard 3-8050-1 universal junction box.
Standard cable length is 7.6 m (25 ft). This style of sensor uses the 3519 Wet-Tap valve only (see individual
product page for more information).

Mfr. Part No. Code Body Rotor Pin Material

Flow Sensor for Wet-Tap mounting with the 3519 Wet-Tap Valve (sold separately)
DN15 to DN100 - ½ to 4 in.
3-2536-P3 159 000 758 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
DN125 to DN200 - 5 to 8 in.
3-2536-P4 159 000 759 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium
DN250 to DN900 - 10 to 36 in.
3-2536-P5 159 000 760 Polypropylene Black PVDF Titanium

Guideline: Combining a 2536 Wet-Tap Sensor with a 3519 Wet-Tap Valve

a) Once a sensor is chosen, it can be mounted in a 3519 Wet-Tap Valve (sold separately).
b) Assembling a sensor with a 3519 Wet-Tap valve is quick and simple. These parts can also be ordered as
complete assemblies. See 3519 product page.
Model 2536 Ordering Notes
Other rotor and pin materials are available for purchase
from the factory and can be easily replaced in the field.
See Accessories section.
Please refer to Wiring, Installation, Accessories and Fittings sections for more information.
www.gfsignet.com
Accessories and Replacement Parts

Mfr. Part No. Code Description

Rotors
3-2536.320-1 198 820 052 Rotor, PVDF Black
3-2536.320-2 159 000 272 Rotor, PVDF Natural
3-2536.320-3 159 000 273 Rotor, ETFE
3-2536.322-1 198 820 056 Sleeved Rotor, PVDF Black
3-2536.322-2 198 820 057 Sleeved Rotor, PVDF Natural
3-2536.322-3 198 820 058 Sleeved Rotor, ETFE
Rotor Pins
M1546-1 198 801 182 Pin, Titanium
M1546-2 198 801 183 Pin, Hastelloy-C
M1546-3 198 820 014 Pin, Tantalum
M1546-4 198 820 015 Pin, Stainless Steel
P51545 198 820 016 Pin, Ceramic
O-Rings
1220-0021 198 801 000 O-ring, FKM (2 required per sensor)
1224-0021 198 820 006 O-ring, EPR (EPDM) (2 required per sensor)
1228-0021 198 820 007 O-ring, FFKM (2 required per sensor)
Miscellaneous
P31536 198 840 201 Sensor Plug, Polypropylene
P31542-3 159 000 464 Sensor Cap, Blue
3-2536.555 159 500 532 Sensor Cap, Gray
P31934 159 000 466 Conduit Cap
P51589 159 000 476 Conduit Adapter Kit
5523-0222 159 000 392 Cable (per foot), 2 cond. w/shield, 22 AWG
3-2536.321 198 820 054 PVDF Natural, Rotor Kit (rotor and pin)
3-8050 159 000 184 Universal Mount Kit
3-8050-1 159 000 753 Universal Junction Box
3-8050.390-1 159 001 702 Retaining Nut Replacement Kit, NPT, Valox (for use with 8510 and 8512)
3-8050.390-3 159 310 116 Retaining Nut Replacement Kit, NPT, PP (for use with 8510 and 8512)
3-8050.390-4 159 310 117 Retaining Nut Replacement Kit, NPT, PVDF (for use with 8510 and 8512)
3-8051 159 000 187 Transmitter Integral Adapter (for use with 8510 and 8512)
3-8051-1 159 001 755 Transmitter Integral Mounting Kit, NPT, PP (for use with 8510 and 8512)
3-8051-2 159 001 756 Transmitter Integral Mounting Kit, NPT, PVDF (for use with 8510 and 8512)

3-2536.099 Rev P (02/20)

© Georg Fischer Signet LLC
3401 Aero Jet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 • www.gfsignet.com • e-mail: [email protected]
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. All corporate names and trademarks stated herein are the property of their respective companies.

www.gfsignet.com
Signet 9900 Transmitter

Member of the SmartPro® Family of Instruments

Features
• Modbus Module supports RS485 Serial Modbus
Communications

• Multiple sensor types supported with one

instrument

• “Dial-type” digital bar graph

• Modules are field installable and replaceable

anytime

• Optional Relay Module for addition of two dry

contact relays

• Optional H COMM Module for two-way

Panel Mount Field Mount communication

• Optional Batch Module for Batch Control

The Signet 9900 Transmitter provides a single channel
interface for many different parameters including Flow, • Modbus Module for connection to Serial, RS485,
pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity, Salinity, Pressure, Modbus networks
Temperature, Level, Dissolved Oxygen, and other sensors
that output a 4 to 20 mA signal. The 9900-1P Transmitter • One 4 to 20 mA output in base unit. One additional
can also be used as a Batch Controller when a Batch 4 to 20 mA available with optional module
Module and Relay Module are installed.
• Rear Enclosure kits for panel, wall or pipe
mounting
The 9900 is offered in both panel or field mount versions.
Both configurations offer an extra large (3.90” x 3.90”) • Warning and Relay LED indicators for
auto-sensing backlit display features “at-a-glance” “at a glance” visibility
visibility that can be viewed at 4-5 times the distance
over traditional transmitters. The highly illuminated • Customizable features including digital label for
display and large characters reduce the risk of misreading custom identification
or misinterpreting the displayed values. The display
shows separate lines for units, main and secondary • Optional PC COMM configuration tool for
measurements as well as a “dial-type” digital bar graph. configuration at a PC

The 9900 can run on 12 to 32 VDC power (24 VDC nominal),

and can also be loop powered with compatible sensors.
MEASURING EQUIPMENT
77CJ

Rear Enclosure kits are available for the 9900-1P Panel

Mount. Kit options include either a Hinged Cover Applications
(3-9900.399-1) for wall or pipe mount installations, or a • Wastewater Treatment
Flat Cover (3-9900.399-2) designed to fit inside a panel for • Reverse Osmosis
waterproof protection. • Deionization
– Ultra Pure Water
The 9900 offers complete flexibility, plug-in modules allow – Two Bed System
the unit to easily adapt to meet changing customer needs. – Mixed Bed System
Optional modules include the new Modbus as well as the • Chemical Manufacturing/Addition
Relay, Direct Conductivity/Resistivity, H COMM, Batch, • Metal and Plastic Finishing
4 to 20 mA Output, and a PC COMM Configuration Tool. • Fume Scrubber
• Cooling Towers
The unit can be used with default values for quick and
• Media Filtration
easy programming or can be customized with labeling,
adjustable minimum and maximum dial settings, and unit
of measure and decimal location choices. U.S. Patent Nos.: D662,844 S, D622,845 S
Taiwan Patent Nos: D147,149, D147,150
Specifications
General
Input Channels One
3
Input Types Digital (S L) Serial ASCII, TTL level, 9600 bps
Frequency Range 0.5 to 1500 Hz
Accuracy 0.5% of reading
Measurement Types Flow, pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity, Salinity, Pressure, Temperature, Level, Dissolved Oxygen,
Batch or user-defined (via 8058)
Enclosure and Display
Case Material PBT
Window Shatter-resistant glass
Keypad 4 buttons, injection-molded silicone rubber seal
Display Backlit, 7 and 14-segment
Update Rate 1s
LCD Contrast 5 settings
Indicators “Dial-type” digital bar graph. LEDs for Open Collector, Relays and Warning Indicator
Enclosure Size ¼ DIN
Mounting 9900-1P
Panel ¼ DIN, ribbed on four sides for panel mounting clip inside panel, silicon gasket included. Optional
rear enclosure with flat cover available for waterproof protection when installed inside a panel.
Wall Options include 9900-1P installed in pre-wired NEMA enclosure, wall mount enclosure or inside of
rear enclosure with hinged cover. (USA Only)
Pipe Optional Rear Enclosure with hinged cover and 9900-1P for pipe mount installation
Mounting 9900-1
Field (Integral) Options include yellow universal or integral kits for installation with sensor
Display Ranges
pH 0.00 to 15.00 pH
pH Temperature -39.99 °C to 149.99 °C -40 °F to 302 °F
ORP -1999 to +1999 mV
Flow Rate -9999 to 99999 units per second, minute, hour or day
Totalizer 0.00 to 99999999 units
Conductivity 0.0000 to 99999 μS, mS, PPM and PPB (TDS), kΩ, MΩ
Conductivity Temperature -100 °C to 250 °C –148 °F to 350 °F (application and sensor dependent)
Temperature -99 °C to 350 °C –99 °F to 350 °F
Pressure -40 to 1000 psi
Level -9999 to 99999 m, cm, ft, in, %
Volume 0 to 99999 cm3, m3, in3, ft3, gal, L, lb, kg, %
Salinity 0 to 99.97 PPT
Dissolved Oxygen PPM 0-50, % SAT 0-200, 0 to 999.9 TORR
Dissolved Oxygen
-99 °C to 350 °C –99 °F to 350 °F
Temperature
Environmental
Ambient Operating Temperature
Backlit LCD -10 °C to 70 °C 14 °F to 158 °F
Storage Temperature -15 °C to 70 °C 5 °F to 158 °F
Relative Humidity 0 to 100% condensing for field mount; 0 to 95% non-condensing for panel mount
Maximum Altitude 4,000 m (13,123 ft)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X/IP65 (front face only on panel mount); field mount is 100% NEMA 4X/IP65 when used
with universal or integral installation kits

www.gfsignet.com
Specifications (continued)
Electrical Requirements
Power to Sensors
Voltage +4.9 to 5.5 VDC @ 25 °C, regulated
Current 1.5 mA max in loop power mode (up to 2.0 mA with 24 V @ 300 Ω max. loop impedance);
20 mA max when using DC power
Short Circuit Protected
Isolation Low voltage (< 48V AC/DC) to loop with DC power connected
No isolation when using loop power only
Terminal Blocks Pluggable screw type 14 AWG max wire gauge
Input Power
DC 10.8 to 35.2 VDC, regulated
9900 without Relay Module 200 mA @ 10.8 VDC to 35.2 VDC
9900 with Relay Module 300 mA @ 10.8 VDC to 35.2 VDC
Overvoltage Protection 48 Volt Transient Protection Device
Current limiting for circuit protection
Reverse-Voltage Protection
Loop Power
Loop Power Only
Max. Loop Impedance 50 Ω @ 12 V 325 Ω @ 18 V 600 Ω @ 24 V
With DC Power Input or with 2nd loop, all the time
Max. Loop Impedance 250 Ω @ 12 V 500 Ω @ 18 V 750 Ω @ 24 V
Relay Specifications
Dry-Contact Relays (2) Open Collector (1)
Type SPDT N/A
Form C N/A
Max. Current Rating 5 A resistive 50 mA DC
Max. Voltage Rating 30 VDC or 250 VAC 30 VDC
Hysteresis Adjustable (absolute in engineering units) (EUs)
Latch Reset in test screen only
Delay 9999.9 seconds (max.)
Test Mode Set On or Off
Cycle Time 99999 seconds (max.)
Maximum Pulse Rate 300 pulses/minute
Proportional Pulse 400 pulses/minute
Volumetric Pulse Width 0.1 to 3200 s
Pulse Width Modulation 0.1 to 320 s
Input Types
Digital (S3L) or AC frequency
4 to 20 mA input via the 8058-1
pH/ORP input via the Digital (S3L) output from the 2750/2751 pH/ORP Sensor Electronics
Raw Conductivity/Resistivity input directly from Signet Conductivity/Resistivity electrodes via Direct Conductivity/
Resistivity Module or via 2850
Input Specifications
Digital (S3L) Serial ACSII, TTL level, 9600 bps
Frequency Input
Sensitivity 80 mV @ 5 Hz, gradually increasing with frequency
Span 0.5 Hz to 1500 Hz @ TTL level input
Accuracy ± 0.5% or reading max error @ 25 °C
Resolution 1 μS
Repeatability ± 0.2% of reading

www.gfsignet.com
Specifications (continued)
Input Specifications continued
Power Supply
Rejection ±1 μA per volt
Short Circuit Protected
Update Rate (1/frequency) + 150 ms
Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module (3-9900.394)
Accuracy Conductivity +/- 2% of Reading
Temperature 0.5 °C
Resolution Conductivity 0.1% of Reading
Temperature <0.2 °C
Update Rate 2.5 Seconds
Compatible Electrodes All GF Signet Sensors
Output Specifications
Current Output - One (1); Two (2) with 4 to 20 mA Output Module
Current Loop Output Standard ANSI-ISA 50.00.01 Class H
Current Output 4 to 20 mA, isolated, fully adjustable and reversible
Span 3.8 to 21 mA
Zero 4.0 mA factory set; user programmable from 3.8 to 5.0 mA
Full Scale 20.00 mA factory set; user programmable from 19.0 to 21.0 mA
Accuracy ±32 μA max. error @ 25 °C @ 24 VDC
Resolution 6 μA or better
Temperature Drift ±1 μA per °C
Power Supply Rejection ±1 μA per V
Isolation Low voltage (< 48 VAC/DC)
Voltage 12 to 32 VDC ±10%
Max. Impedance
250 Ω @ 12 VDC 500 Ω @ 18 VDC 750 Ω @ 24 VDC
(with DC power input)
Max. Impedance
50 Ω @ 12 VDC 325 Ω @ 18 VDC 600 Ω @ 24 VDC
(no DC power input)
Update Rate 150 mS nominal
Short circuit and reverse polarity protected
Adjustable Span Reversible
Error Condition Selectable error condition 3.6 or 22 mA
Actual update rate determined by sensor type
Test Mode Increment to desired current (range 3.8 to 21.00 mA)
Shipping Weights
Base Unit 0.63 kg 1.38 lb
Modbus Module 0.16 kg 0.35 lb
H COMM Module 0.16 kg 0.35 lb
Conductivity Module 0.16 kg 0.35 lb
Relay Module 0.19 kg 0.41 lb
Batch Module 0.16 kg 0.35 lb
4 to 20 Output Module 0.16 kg 0.35 lb
Rear Enclosure, Hinged cover 0.30 kg 0.65 lb
Rear Enclosure, Flat cover 0.28 kg 0.60 lb
Standards and Approvals
CE, UL, CUL, FCC
RoHS Compliant, China RoHS
Lloyd’s Register
Manufactured under ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 for Environmental Management
and OHSAS 18001 for Occupational Health and Safety

www.gfsignet.com
Dimensions - Panel Mount Dimensions - Rear Enclosure
99.06 mm 29.97 mm
(3.90 in.) (1.18 in.)

110 mm 21.08 mm
(4.33 in.) (0.83 in.)
99.06 mm 91.44 mm
(3.90 in.) (3.60 in.)

110 mm 71.4 mm
8.13 mm (4.33 in.) (2.81 in.)
(0.32 in.) 54.10 mm
(2.13 in.)
Front View Side View

Integral Mount Hinged Cover Flat Cover

3-9900.396
8.38 mm 7.87 mm
Angle Adjustment Adapter Kit (0.33 in.) (0.31 in.)
44.45 mm 2.29 mm
(1.75 in.) (0.09 in.)

(2) 12.7 mm
107 mm

(0.5 in.)

21.08 mm
71.12 mm

(0.83 in.)
40.13 mm 97.5 mm
(4.21 in.) 88.90 mm (1.58 in.) (2.80 in.) (3.84 in.)
(3.50 in.)
3.50 97.5 mm
25° (3.84 in.)
Ref. 44.58 mm 22.9 mm 63.23 mm
(1.77 in.) (0.9 in.) (2.45 in.)
24.13 mm 97.5 mm
10.67 mm (3.84 in.)
(0.95 in.) (0.42 in.)

88.90 mm 88.90
3.50mm Back View Side View
Back View Side View
(3.50 in.) (3.50 in.)
97.5 mm (3.84 in.)
24.35 mm
(0.96 in.)

R 31.75 mm (R 1.25 in.)

Top View

9900 Generation 9900 Generation

Sensor model 9900 Module
I II III IV I II III IV
515/8510 X X X X H COMM X X X X
525 X X X X Relay X X X X
U1000 X Conductivity/Resistivity X X X X
2000 X X X X Batch X X X
2100 X X X X 4 to 20 mA Output X X
2250 X X X X Modbus X X X X
2350 X X X X
2450 X X X X Open Collector (R1) Backlight Sensor
Indicator LED (do not block)
2507 X X X X Mechanical Relay (R2) Mechanical Relay (R3)
Indicator LED Indicator LED
2536/8512 X X X X
Warning LED
2537-5 X X X X
2540 X X X X Bar Graph
2551 X X X X Units of Measure
(GPM, pH, sec, %, etc.)
2552 X X X X
2610-51 X X X X Value
2610 + 8058 X X X X Label
2724-2726 X X X X Menu Indication
2734-2736 X X X X
2750 X X X X
2751 X X X X
Menu Navigation Keys
2756-2757 X X X X
2764-2767 X X X X
ENTER
2774-2777 X X X X
2819-2823 X X X X
2839-2842 X X X X All possible segments shown in this illustration. The instrument’s software controls
which segments are shown at any particular time. Only the bar graph segment outline
2850 X X X X and GF logo are visible when the unit is turned off.

4150 + 8058 X X X X

www.gfsignet.com
 Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount Field (Integral) Mount
Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter
(Includes mounting bracket and with Rear Enclosure with Junction Box (varies with sensor and installation)
panel gasket)

+ +
3-8050 3-8051-X 3-8052 3-9900.396
(optional)
3-9900.399-1
2270 with 8058 iGo Converter
Signet Sensors - Flow, Level, Temperature, Pressure, DO
plus other 4 to 20 mA
Use one input from sensor options below*

FLOW

+
515 8510 525 U1000 2000 2100 2507 2537 2540 2551 2552 2250 2350 2450 2610 2270 8058-1 iGo Converter
2536 8512

Signet Fittings - See individual sensor data sheets All sold separately

Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount Field (Integral) Mount

Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter
(Includes mounting bracket and with Rear Enclosure with Junction Box (varies with sensor and installation)
panel gasket)
System Overview

+ +
3-8050 3-8052 3-9900.396
3-9900.399-1 (optional)

Signet Sensors - pH/ORP Signet Wet-Tap Electrode Model 2756, 2757 and
Use one input from sensor options below* 3719 Wet-Tap with 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics
with 2751 Smart Sensor Electronics

+ +

Signet Fittings - See individual sensor data sheets All sold separately

Panel Mount Pipe, Tank, Wall Mount Field (Integral) Mount

Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter Signet Model 9900 Transmitter
(Includes mounting bracket and with Rear Enclosure with 3-9900.396 Angle Adapter and Junction Box
panel gasket) (varies with sensor and installation)

+
3-9900.396** 3-8050 3-8052
3-9900.399-1

Signet Sensors - Conductivity/Resistivity and Salinity Electrodes

Use one input from electrode options below*
with Conductivity Module or 2850 Sensor Electronics

+ OR

Signet Fittings - See individual sensor data sheets All sold separately

* See individual sensor datasheets for additional information

**3-9900.396 is required with the Conductivity Module and either 3-8050 or 3-8052 to provide sufficient clearance

3-9900-1
(159 001 696)
Field Mount
3-9900-396
(159 001 701)
Angle Adjustment
Adapter Kit

3-8051 (159 000 187)

3-9900.399-1 3-9900.399-2 3-8051-1 (159 001 755)
(159 001 834) (159 001 835) 3-8051-2 (159 001 756)
Rear Enclosure Kit, Rear Enclosure Kit, Flow Sensor
hinged cover flat cover Integral Mounting Kit

www.gfsignet.com
 3-9900.270-M2
Plug in Modules

D1 (RS485 +)
D0 (RS485 -)
Gnd
Optional modules and accessories are available for the 9900: DC Po
wer

a. Base Unit (required) Loop Vo

ltage

b. Slot for optional H COMM or Modbus Modules

a.
PWR +

PWR -

c. Slot for optional Conductivity/Resistivity, Batch, or Loop +

Loop -

4 to 20 mA Output Module
d. Slot for optional Relay Module (not available on field mount)
Module
Each item is ordered separately. Modbus
3-9900.270-M3
Modules are field-replaceable at any time. Pin 5
Pin 3 Pin 2
b.
c.
d. Pin 4 Pin 1

wer
DC Po
wer
DC Po
ltage
Loop Vo
Loop
Volta
ge 3-9900.270-M4

dule
us Mo
Modb

Relay Module (Panel Installations Only) (3-9900.393) Modbus Modules (3-9900.270-MX)

This module adds two programmable dry-contact relays These Modules allow the 9900 to communicate with
to the standard Open Collector output in the base unit. Automation systems using the Modbus serial RS485 Protocol.
3-9900.270-M2 - Terminal Block Connections (Panel Mount Only)
3-9900.270-M3 - M12 Connector (Field Mount Only)
3-9900.270-M4 - Modbus Module with 5 Wire Cable Assembly

wer
DC Po

Voltag
e wer
Loop DC Po

ge
Volta
Loop
SHIELD
TEMP (WHT)

dule
ISO GND (BLK)
SIGNAL (RED)

MM Mo
H CO

le dule
/Res
Modu MM Mo
Cond H CO

Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module (3-9900.394) H COMM Module (HART®) (3-9900.395)

The Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module interfaces The H COMM Module enables communication between
Signet 2819-2823 and 2839-2842 Conductivity the 9900 and a HART® enabled device.
electrodes directly to the 9900. (Not available for use on 3-9900-1BC Batch Controller)

Batch Module (3-9900.397) 4 to 20 mA Output Module (3-9900.398-1)

The Batch Module adds batch capability to the The 4 to 20 mA Output Module adds a second 4 to 20 mA
9900 Transmitter (Generation II and newer). Output to the 9900 Transmitter (Generation III and later).
It is compatible with all Signet flow sensors. Each of the outputs can be used to output the primary and/
or secondary measurement.
www.gfsignet.com
Ordering Information
Mfr. Part No Code Description
9900 Base Unit - Single Channel, Multi-Parameter, 4 to 20 mA, Open Collector, DC power
3-9900-1P 159 001 695 9900 Panel Mount Transmitter
3-9900-1 159 001 696 9900 Field Mount Transmitter
3-9900-1BC 159 001 770 Batch Controller System
Optional Accessory Modules
3-9900.270-M2 159 200 121 Modbus Module with Terminal Block Assembly (Panel Mount Only)
ule
s Mod
Cond/Re

3-9900.270-M3 159 200 122 Modbus Module with M12 Connector Assembly (Field Mount Only)
M Mod
ule
3-9900.270-M4 159 200 128 Modbus Module with 5 Wire Cable Assembly
H COM

3-9900.393 159 001 698 Relay Module - 2 DCR (Dry-contact relays)

3-9900.394 159 001 699 Direct Conductivity/Resistivity Module
3-9900.395 159 001 697 H COMM Module
3-9900.397 159 310 163 Batch Module
Module
Modbus

3-9900.398-1 159 001 784 4 to 20 mA Output Module*

*Module adds a second 4 to 20 mA output. One 4 to 20 mA output is included in the base unit.

Accessories and Replacement Parts

Mfr. Part No Code Description
6682-0204 159 001 709 Conductivity Module Plug, 4 Pos, Right Angle
6682-1102 159 001 710 DC Power Plug, 2 Pos, Right Angle
6682-1103 159 001 711 Relay Module Plug, 3 Pos, Right Angle
6682-1104 159 001 712 Loop Power Plug, 4 Pos, Right Angle
6682-3104 159 001 713 Freq/S3L Plug, 4 Pos, Right Angle
6682-3004 159 001 725 Terminal Block Plug
7310-1024 159 873 004 24 VDC Power Supply, 0.42 A, 10W
7310-2024 159 873 005 24 VDC Power Supply, 1.0 A , 24W
7310-4024 159 873 006 24 VDC Power Supply, 1.7 A, 40W
7310-6024 159 873 007 24 VDC Power Supply, 2.5 A, 60W
7310-7024 159 873 008 24 VDC Power Supply, 4.0 A, 96W
3-0252 159 001 808 0252 Configuration Tool
3-8050 159 000 184 Universal Mount Kit
3-8050.396 159 000 617 RC Filter kit (for relay use), 2 per kit
3-8051 159 000 187 Flow Sensor Integral Mounting Kit, NPT, Valox
3-8051-1 159 001 755 Flow Sensor Integral Mounting Kit, NPT, PP
3-8051-2 159 001 756 Flow Sensor Integral Mounting Kit, NPT, PVDF
3-8052 159 000 188 ¾ in. Integral Mount Kit
3-8058-1 159 000 966 I-Go® Signal Converter, wire-mount
3-8058-2 159 000 967 I-Go® Signal Converter, DIN rail mount
3-9000.392-1 159 000 839 Liquid Tight Connector Kit, NPT (1 pc.)
3-9900.270-CB1 159 200 123 Replacement Wire Cable Assembly for M1
3-9900.270-CB2 159 200 124 Replacement Terminal Block Assembly for M2
3-9900.270-CB3 159 200 125 Replacement M12 Connector Assembly for M3
3-9900.270-CB4 159 200 129 Replacement Cable Assembly for M4
3-9900.390 159 001 714 Standard Connector Kit, Right Angle, 9900 Transmitter
5541-5005 159 855 021 5 meter (16 ft) M12 cable
5541-5010 159 855 022 10 meter (32 ft) M12 cable
3-9900.391 159 001 715 Optional Connector Kit, In-Line, 9900 Transmitter
3-9900.392 159 001 700 Wall Mount Accessory Kit for 9900
3-9900.396 159 001 701 Angle Adjustment Adapter Kit (for Field Mounting)
3-9900.399-1 159 001 834 Rear enclosure kit, hinged cover
3-9900.399-2 159 001 835 Rear enclosure kit, flat cover
3-9900.099 Rev P (02/19)
© Georg Fischer Signet LLC
3401 Aero Jet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 • www.gfsignet.com • e-mail: signet.ps@georgfischer.com
Specifications subject to change without notice. All rights reserved. All corporate names and trademarks stated herein are the property of their respective companies.
BOMBAS DOSIFICADORAS Y
TANQUES PARA QUÍMICOS
Tekna
Solenoid driven dosing pumps

Your Choice,
Our Commitment
02 Solutions for Water & Industry

Five times the Flexibility

A single outer casing contains 5 different models with flow rates
ranging from 0.4 to 110 l/h at up to 20 bar. The single casing’s fixing
points remain the same, making the pump idea for the assembly of
preconstructed skids

Tekna Series is the range of innovative wall mounted solenoid driven dosing pumps that SEKO
has designed following many years of experience working with its customers worldwide. These
multifunctional solenoid driven dosing pumps maintain outstanding precision and reliability,
critical to any customer, characteristics synonymous with the SEKO name.

PVDF pump head and ceramic ball valve as standard

Using only premium materials in its manufacture, Tekna's pump head comes as standard in PVDF
and with a ceramic ball valve. These features assure high performance for the chosen applications
and improve the reliability of the pump assuring the chemical compatibility of the wetted parts.

Long life diaphragm tested to give "Five Year" working life

SEKO’s diaphragms are solid PTFE offering superior life expectancy and are guaranteed by SEKO
for 5 years, making routine replacement no longer necessary.

Steady dosing performance

Tekna features reduced energy consumption thanks to a Stabilized Multi Power Supply 100 - 240
Vac 50/60 Hz.

Intuitive programming
A new concept of programming menu. Once a function is selected, the pump displays only the
parameters that are associated with the specific function to reduced programming
time.Programming menu are self explanatory and available in 5 languages.

Also available ATEX Version

Tekna is also available in ATEX standard compliant versions. This pump offers digital dosing with
a constant or proportional flow rate, that is manually adjustable from 0 - 100% and has a level
control input. Tekna ATEX comes as standard with a pump head in AISI 316. Optionally available
are heads in PVDF, outer casing made in aluminium and with a manual priming valve.
 Solenoid driven dosing pumps 03

500
Model
with flow rate from 0.4 to 1.5 l/h
and pressures up to 20 bar

600
Model
with flow rate from 2.5 to 4.2 l/h
and pressures up to 20 bar

603
Model
with flow rate from 4 to 8 l/h
and pressures up to 12 bar

800
Model
with flow rate from 7 to 18 l/h
and pressures up to 16 bar

803
Model
CE II 3GD with flow rate from 20 to 110 l/h
Ex ic nA IIB T4 Gc
Ex tc III CT120°C Dc IP65 and pressures up to 5 bar
04 Solutions for Water & Industry

Overview
Analogue and Digital Version

Analogue dosing pump with Analogue dosing pump with

constant dosage Tekna AKS constant dosage Tekna AKL
Analogue dosing pump with constant flow rate, with Analogue dosing pump with constant flow rate, with
manual adjustment by control dial on the front panel manual adjustment by control dial on the front panel
< 2 frequency range (0 – 20% or 0 – 100%) < 2 frequency range (0 – 20% or 0 – 100%)
< Power-ON led indicator < Power-ON led indicator and level control input

Analogue dosing pump with Analogue dosing pump with timed

proportional dosage Tekna APG dosage Tekna ATL
Analogue dosing pump with constant flow rate, with Analogue dosing pump with constant flow rate, with
manual adjustment; proportional flow rate according to an manual adjustment and timed dosage with T ON - T
external analogue (4 – 20 mA) or digital pulse signal (e.g. OFF double regulation.
from water meter).
< 3 control dials (flow rate % - T ON regulation - T OFF
< Control dial (percentage and "n" value in multiplication
regulation)
mode)
< 6 position adjustable switch

< “pacing” function adjustable by dip switch

 Solenoid driven dosing pumps 05

Digital dosing pump with proportional Digital dosing pump with proportional
dosage Tekna TPG dosage Tekna TPR
Digital dosing pump with constant flow rate with manual Digital dosing pump with pH/Redox control meter built in.
adjustment; proportional flow rate according to an external < Digital interface for constant or proportional dosing,
analogue (4 – 20 mA) or digital pulse signal (e.g. from water depending on the measured pH or Rx value
meter). < PT100 probe input for thermal compensation

< Timer function, ppm dosing, statistics, password and < Repetition alarm relay

On/Off input (remote switch) < Input On-Off for remote control

< Available also in ATEX version < 4 – 20 mA output for measure transmission

Digital dosing pump with proportional Digital dosing pump with timed
dosage Tekna TMP dosage Tekna TCK
Digital dosing pump with Chlorine, Hydrogen Peroxide or Digital dosing pump with constant flow rate with
Peracetic Acid control meter built in. manual adjustment, or timer control.
< Instrument on board set via Software < Programmable timed relay
< PT100 probe input for thermal compensation < Available also in ATEX version
< Repetition alarm relay

< Input On-Off for remote control

< 4 – 20 mA output for measure transmission

06 Solutions for Water & Industry

Overview
Accessories

Threaded water meters Flanged water meters Mixers

TC1 - TH1 - TC0 Series FC Series Electric mixers, three-phases or
Single-jet water meters with pulse A high capacity helical vane single-phase, slow (200 rpm) or fast
sender, dry dial and roller reading. (Woltmann) type water meter with (1400 rpm) and flange attachment,
Suitable for cold water up to 30 ° C. dry dial reading and pulse sender. for SER series tanks..
< Suitable for cold water up to 50 ° C. < Material : PVC - AISI 316
Size (4 or 1 pulse/l) from ½"(13
<
mm) to 2” (50 mm) < Size from 2" (DN50) to 6” (DN 150) Shaft length : 600 - 800 - 900 -
< Max flow (short period) from 3 to < Max flow (short period) from 30 to 1100 mm
< Propeller diameter: Slow 150 -
30 m3/h 300 m3/h
< Min flow (accuracy ±5%) from 30 < Min flow (accuracy ±5%) from 0,55 220 mm / Fast 90 mm
< Motor : 0,12 kW
to 450 l/h to 3 m3/h

without level probe

with level probe

Polyethylene tanks Reinforcement and Suction Devices

SER Series Uncovered tanks
Our tanks are designed to be Tank reinforcement made of PVC (20 A suction filter is provided to protect
integrated into dosing system mm thick) to be used to install pump valves from debris or particles
assemblies using mixers and either mixers and motor driven pumps or that could obstruct the pump valve.
motor driven or solenoid dosing solenoid dosing pumps on SER Suction devices can also be supplied
pumps. All are made from food safe series tanks . with integral level controls. These
polyethylene and are resistant to allow the use of alarms, and protect
most commonly found chemicals. against the system running dry.
< Storage capacity (L) : 50 - 100 - < Easy installation; standard FPM
250-300 - 500 - 1000 seals (EPDM on request); made of
PVC with transparent PVC suction;
foot filter and non-return valve
 Solenoid driven dosing pumps 07

Flow Sensor Priming-aid Pump head with

In order to assess the actual dosing Priming issues may occur with automatic degassing
phase, the flow sensor can be used to dosing pumps with low flow rates valve
detect the pump’s pulsations during and extreme suction lifts compared
the delivery phase. The sensor can to the pump capacity. This accessory Where gases are metered, this
also be used to determine the actual can eliminate such problems. accessory allows resumption of
correct dosing without any
dosing flow rate. This flow sensor is < Body PVC intervention from the user..
fitted directly on the delivery valve on < Seals FPM
< Body PVDF - Seals FPM - Balls
the dosing pump. < Connections IN/OUT 4/6 or

< Body PVC - PMMA - PVDF 8/12 tube Ceramic

< Flow rate reduction max. 20%
< Seals FPM - EPDM < Model 300 ml
< Connections 4/6 tube
< Pressure max. 10 bar
< Should be used combined with

603 and 800 models

Adjustables Injection valves Multifunction Fixed /

valves HY Series < Body PVC valve Adjustable
< backpressure
< Body PVC Diaphragm FPM < Body PVDF
< Diaphragm FPM (standard) or EPDM < Diaphragm PTFE valves
(standard) or EPDM (upon request) < Seals FPM - EPDM
< Flow rate max. 50 l/h < Body PVDF
(upon request) < Backpressure
Pressure max. 10 bar < Diaphragm / Seals
< Flow rate max. 50 l/h max 5 bar
< IN connections 1/2” FPM - EPDM
Pressure max. 10 bar < Overpressure
Gm, 4/6 and 8/12 < Backpressure
< Connections 1/2”Gm, max 18 bar
4/6 and 8/12 tube tube < Connections IN/OUT
Fixed 1,5 bar
< OUT connections 1/2” Adjustable
4/6 or 8/12 tube
Gm 0,5 ÷ 5 bar
< Connections

IN 4/6 tube
OUT 3/8”G - 1/2”G
Your Choice,
Our Commitment
In the modern Globalised world, being a privately
owned Company has significant benefits especially for
our Customers, our Partners. For over 40 years, SEKO
has developed a Global organisation able to take the
longer view, manage the pressure of the now, and to
plan for the long term, delivering true Partnership for
our Customers, with transparency and mutual respect
for each other.

Whether it's for our reknown flexibility, our attention

to detail, the high-quality products, or just the way we
do business, we understand that it's Your Choice to do
business with us. It is Our Commitment to fulfill your
needs wherever you, our Customers are.

For more information about our

portfolio, worldwide locations,
approvals, certifications, and local
representatives, please visit
www.seko.com

As part of a process of on-going product development, SEKO

reserves the right to amend and change specifications without prior
notice. Published data may be subject to change.
© SEKO, Layout and origin: Italy, 850001-Tekna_en, 12.2017
 Tinacos

Ficha técnica

Beneficios

· Capa gris exterior y negra intermedia, que lo hacen resistente a la luz

ultravioleta.
· Capa blanca interior lisa, que facilita la limpieza del Tinaco.
· Equipado con Válvula de Llenado 1/2” y Flotador Nº 5.
450 L
· Su tapa click con cierre perfecto evita que entren contaminantes al agua.
· Fácil instalación.
· Fabricado con polietileno.

Capacidades Tinacos Resistec Gris

Capacidad Diámetro Altura Abastecimiento
SKU
(L) (m) (m) (personas)
500440 450 0.85 0.99 2
500441 750 1.10 1.02 4
500442 1 100 1.10 1.40 5 750 L

Accesorios
1. Válvula de Llenado.
2. Flotador No. 5 con varilla.

1 2 1 100 L

Calidad, al mejor precio.

TABLERO ELÉCTRICO Y DE CONTROL
Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Technical documentation
Load capacity
Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Contents/general remarks

Contents
1. General notes .............................................................................2 4. Configuration variants ....................................................... 8 – 22
4.1 Enclosure panels
2. Transportation variants ....................................................... 3 – 6 – Side panel, screw-fastened and side panel .................................8
2.1 Transportation by crane – Side panel, hinged ......................................................................8
– With eyebolts .............................................................................3 – Rear panel ..................................................................................8
– With top mounting module and eyebolts ....................................3 – Roof ...........................................................................................8
– With combination angles ............................................................4 – Door ...........................................................................................9
– Partial door .................................................................................9
2.2 Transportation by fork-lift truck
– Mounting plate ................................................................. 10 – 11
– Transportation of individual enclosures........................................5
– Partial mounting plate ...............................................................12
– Transportation of bayed enclosures ..................................... 5 – 6
– Partial assembly plate ...............................................................13
2.3 Transportation on castors ..............................................................6
4.2 482.6 mm (19˝) installation system
– Swing frame, small ...................................................................14
3. Installation variants....................................................................7 – Swing frame, large....................................................................15
3.1 Installation of enclosures – Adaptor section/piece, 482.6 mm (19˝) .....................................16
– Installation on levelling feet .........................................................7 – Slide rail VX for adaptor section, 482.6 mm (19˝) .......................17
– Installation of an enclosure on top of an enclosure ......................7 4.3 Rail systems
– Punched section with mounting flange
18 x 64 mm, 23 x 64 mm, 23 x 89 mm ............................ 18 – 19
– Punched section without mounting flange
23 x 64 mm ...................................................................... 18 – 19
– Punched section with mounting flange 14 x 39 mm..................20
– Punched rail 18 x 39 mm..........................................................20
– Support rail 75 x 20 mm ...........................................................21
– Support rail 48 x 26 mm ...........................................................21
– System divider ..........................................................................22
– Screw load ...............................................................................22

1. General remarks
Based on the results of in-depth testing and customer feedback, we To aid understanding of the load specifications given in Newtons,
hope that this technical documentation will provide you with plenty here is the conversion formula for converting into kilograms.
of useful tips and assistance when transporting and siting large
F [N] = m [kg] · g [m/s2]
enclosures.
The following technical descriptions for the various load options with Example: 9.81 N = 1 kg · 9.81 m/s2
the VX25 and VX SE enclosure systems are not warranted properties,
and we are unable to accept any liability in this regard. Should you have any further questions or suggestions on the points
Additionally, Rittal reserves the right to extend or modify this technical raised in this technical documentation, please get in touch with your
documentation as and when necessary. Rittal specialist advisor.

2 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Transportation variants

2.1 Transportation by crane

All enclosures are suitable for transporting by crane, either for stand-alone siting (VX25, VX SE) or as bayed suites (VX25).

Eyebolt 4586.000 Combination angle 4540.000 Cable pull

For transporting enclosures Combination angles must be The cable pull angle between
by crane. used when transporting bayed the roof plate and the cable
enclosures by crane, to ensure has a significant influence on
the optimum distribution of the total permissible load.
tensile forces. The cable pull angle must not
be less than 45°, and ideally
not less than 60°.

With eyebolts (VX25, VX SE) With top mounting module and eyebolts (VX25)
Individual enclosures are safely transported using the eyebolts. Individual enclosures with top mounting module are safely transported
For symmetrical loads, the following maximum permissible loads apply: using the eyebolts.
For symmetrical loads, the following maximum permissible loads apply:
F ≙ at 90° cable pull angle 13600 N
F ≙ at 60° cable pull angle 6400 N F ≙ at 90° cable pull angle 6800 N
F ≙ at 45° cable pull angle 4800 N F ≙ at 60° cable pull angle 3200 N
F ≙ at 45° cable pull angle 2400 N

Technical documentation/Load capacity 3

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Transportation variants

2.1 Transportation by crane

With combination angles (VX25)
For the enclosure combination shown here with internal baying brackets For the enclosure combination shown here with internal baying brackets
8617.500 and combination angles 4540.000, the load capacity with 8617.500 and combination angles 4540.000, the load capacity with
a cable pull angle of 60° is as follows: a cable pull angle of 60° is as follows:
F1 = 7000 N F1 = 7000 N
F2 = 7000 N F2 = 14000 N
F3 = 7000 N
Note:
– Similarly, with due regard for the specific assembly instructions, Note:
the internal baying block 8617.501 and external baying connectors – Similarly, with due regard for the specific assembly instructions,
8617.502, 8617.503 may also be used. the internal baying block 8617.501 and external baying connectors
8617.502, 8617.503 may also be used.

4 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Transportation variants

2.2 Transportation by fork-lift truck

When transporting individual and bayed enclosures, please take care to ensure that all base/plinth trim panels are fitted, and loads are restricted to
the immediate vicinity of the base/plinth corner pieces.

Transportation of individual enclosures (VX25, VX SE)

Max. 15000 N

Transportation of bayed enclosures (VX25)

Note:
– For bayed enclosures, one base/plinth trim panel should be folded over and fitted at the baying point in such a way as to create a stable bayed
connection in the base/plinth zone.

Technical documentation/Load capacity 5

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Transportation variants

2.2 Transportation by fork-lift truck Note:

– Similarly, with due regard for the specific assembly instructions,
Transportation of bayed enclosures (VX25)
the internal baying block 8617.501 and external baying connectors
For the enclosure combinations shown here with internal baying 8617.502, 8617.503 may also be used. A link to the assembly
brackets 8617.500, the following loads are supported: instructions can be found on our website under the relevant Model No.

Max. 7000 N
Max. 15000 N

Max. 15000 N Max. 14000 N

Max. 7000 N

2.3 Transportation on castors

Transportation of individual and bayed enclosures (VX25, VX SE)
Transport castor for base/plinth system VX 8100.700 (only in conjunction with base/plinth)
Max. dynamic load:
– Individual enclosure: When using 4 castors = 3000 N
– Bayed enclosures: When using 6 castors = 1500 N/enclosure

Max. 1500 N

Max. 3000 N Max. 1500 N

6 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

3.1 Installation of enclosures

Installation on levelling feet 2859.000 (VX25, VX SE) Installation on levelling feet 4612.000 and 8100.780 (VX25, VX SE)
With a static load, the maximum admissible total load is F = 14000 N With a static load, the maximum admissible total load is F = 3000 N

Installation of an enclosure on top of an enclosure (VX25)

When installing enclosures on top of one another, the maximum
admissible static load for the top enclosure is F = 5000 N

Max. 5000 N

Technical documentation/Load capacity 7

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels

Side panel, screw-fastened (VX25) and side panel (VX SE) Side panel, hinged (VX25)
Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection
against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to
enclosures: F = 900 N enclosures: F = 200 N

Hinge for side panel

8106.260
The 180° opening angle
allows unhindered access
from the side. May be
mounted from the inside or
the outside of the enclosure.
Simply exchange the three
panel brackets for hinges.
Note:
– Hinge mounting is only
possible in the vicinity of
the rear panel

Rear panel (VX25, VX SE) Roof (VX25)

Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection
against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to
enclosures: F = 900 N enclosures: F = 200 N

Note:
– When installing roof-
mounted cooling units,
the specific assembly
instructions should be
observed.

8 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels

Door with 130° or 180° hinge (VX25, VX SE)
Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection
against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to
enclosures: F = 900 N (130°/180°)

Note:
– For VX SE, the TS 180° hinge 8800.710 is required for the maximum
static load of F = 900 N.

Partial door (VX25) Size

Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection F [N] Model No.
W x H mm
against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to 600 x 200 10 9682.162
enclosures: See table
800 x 200 10 9682.182
600 x 400 10 9682.164
800 x 400 10 9682.184
600 x 600 50 9682.166
800 x 600 50 9682.186
600 x 800 50 9682.168
800 x 800 50 9682.188
600 x 1000 50 9682.160
800 x 1000 50 9682.180

Technical documentation/Load capacity 9

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels

Mounting plate
All mounting plates are suitable for heavy loads, thanks to their
exceptionally stable and functional design.
Mounting position: Flush with the enclosure frame (VX25, VX SE) Mounting position: Set forward from the enclosure frame (VX25, VX SE)
F = 6000 N F = 5000 N

Mounting position: Plus 20 mm, set back behind the enclosure frame (VX25)
F = 3500 N

10 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels

Mounting plate (VX25, VX SE)
Installation kit for back-to-back mounting plates 8617.360
F = 2500 N per mounting plate

Mounting plate (VX25) For enclosure width

Slide rail for sliding the mounting plate in from the side. F [N] Model No.
mm
For mounting in a set-forward position. 600 5000 8617.400
800 5000 8617.401
1000 5000 8617.403
1200 5000 8617.402

Technical documentation/Load capacity 11

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels

Partial mounting plate (VX25, VX SE)
The load information for partial mounting plates refers solely to mounting
directly on the frame section using the Rittal assembly components
provided especially for this purpose.
Note:
– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX

Vertical installation Horizontal installation

Load value F: See table in conjunction with punched sections without mounting flanges
23 x 64 mm
Load value F = 1250 N

For installation in
Dimensions
Enclosure width mm Enclosure depth (side) mm F [N] Model No.
mm
400 600 800 1000 1200 400 500 600 800
◾ ◾ ◾ ◾ 500 x 300 1500 8617.510
◾ ◾ ◾ 500 x 400 1700 8617.520
◾ ◾ 500 x 500 1700 8617.530
◾ ◾ ◾ ◾ 500 x 700 1700 8617.540
◾ ◾ 500 x 775 1700 8617.550
◾ ◾ ◾ ◾ 700 x 300 1200 8617.560
◾ ◾ ◾ 700 x 400 1500 8617.570
◾ ◾ 700 x 700 1700 8617.580
◾ ◾ ◾ 900 x 300 700 8617.590
◾ ◾ 900 x 400 900 8617.600
◾ ◾ ◾ 900 x 500 1500 8617.610
◾ ◾ ◾ 1100 x 300 700 8617.620
◾ ◾ 1100 x 400 900 8617.630
◾ ◾ ◾ 1100 x 500 1200 8617.640

12 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.1 Enclosure panels Dimensions

Model No.
Partial assembly plate (VX25, VX SE) mm
Partial assembly plates are used to accommodate additional compo- 500 x 400 8617.660
nents inside the enclosure and are extremely flexible to use. For optional 500 x 600 8617.661
installation either upright as a vertical mounting surface, or lying flat as
600 x 400 8617.662
a horizontal base. Attached either directly to the enclosure section or
another partial assembly plate. 600 x 600 8617.663
Note: 800 x 400 8617.664
For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX 800 x 600 8617.665

Vertical installation Horizontal installation

Load value F = 1700 N Load value F = 600 N

Technical documentation/Load capacity 13

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.2 482.6 mm (19˝) installation system For

Swing frame, small (VX25, VX SE) enclosure width F [N] U Model No.
mm
Provided the Rittal assembly components offer adequate protection
against tipping over, the following maximum static loads apply to 150 3 8619.500
enclosures: See table 300 6 8619.510
Note: 450 9 8619.520
600
– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX 500 12 8619.530
500 15 8619.540
500 18 8619.550
150 3 8619.500
300 6 8619.510
450 9 8619.520
800
500 12 8619.530
500 15 8619.540
500 18 8619.550

Front,
top/bottom

Set back, Set back,

top/bottom front/centre

1 1

1 2
2

2 2

For enclosure width mm

 Installation kit 1 pc(s). 600 800
8619.600 8619.610
For enclosure depth mm
400 4 pc(s). 8617.110
 Punched section with mounting
flange 23 x 64 mm, 500 4 pc(s). 8617.120
2 or 4 pc(s) required 600 4 pc(s). 8617.130
800 4 pc(s). 8617.140

14 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.2 482.6 mm (19˝) installation system Installation kit

Swing frame, large (VX25, VX SE) For enclosure width
F [N] Model No.
The enclosure must be adequately attached to ensure its stability. mm
With the large swing frame, the maximum overall load is determined 600 3500 8619.040
by the installation kits used.
800 3500 8619.041
Note: 1200 15001) 8619.042
– When using the 180° hinge (Model No. 8619.051), a maximum load 1)
For two installed swing frames, hinged on the outside, a max. overall load of
of 1500 N is supported. 1000 N per swing frame applies.

Technical documentation/Load capacity 15

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.2 482.6 mm (19˝) installation system For enclosure height

U Model No.
Adaptor section, 482.6 mm (19˝) (VX25, VX SE) mm
For mounting electronic components, subracks and other 482.6 mm 1600 33 8619.300
(19˝) equipment. Adaptor sections may be shortened for partial 1800 38 8619.310
assemblies.
2000 42 8619.320

The load value with two fitted 482.6 mm (19˝) adaptor sections is
F = 460 N. Note:
– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX

Adaptor piece, 482.6 mm (19˝) (VX25, VX SE) U Model No.

For mounting electronic components, subracks and other 482.6 mm
1 8619.330
(19˝) equipment.

The load value with two fitted 482.6 mm (19˝) adaptor pieces is Note:
F = 300 N. – For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX

16 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.2 482.6 mm (19˝) installation system For enclosure depth

F [N] per slide rail Model No.
Slide rail VX for adaptor section 482.6 mm (19˝) mm
with attachment on both sides 500 110 8613.151
600 110 8613.161
800 130 8613.181

Slide rail VX for adaptor section 482.6 mm (19˝) Length mm F [N] per slide rail Model No.
with attachment on both sides
270 230 4531.001

Technical documentation/Load capacity 17

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.3 Rail systems, vertical installation Note:

– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX
Punched sections with mounting flanges, 18 x 64 mm,
23 x 64 mm, 23 x 89 mm and punched sections
without mounting flanges, 23 x 64 mm
Variable, with rows of holes for universal interior installation or partial
assembly. Simply locate into punchings and screw-fasten.

Punched section with mounting flange, Punched section with mounting flange, Punched section with mounting flange,
18 x 64 mm (VX25) 23 x 64 mm (VX25, VX SE) 23 x 89 mm, stainless steel (VX25, VX SE)
for the outer mounting level for the inner mounting level for the inner mounting level
For enclosure For enclosure For enclosure
width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No. width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No. width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No.
mm mm mm
300 2400 8617.000 300 2400 8617.100 400 2400 8100.730
400 2400 8617.010 400 2400 8617.110 500 2400 8100.731
500 2400 8617.020 500 2400 8617.120 600 2400 8100.732
600 2400 8617.030 600 2400 8617.130 800 1800 8100.733
800 1800 8617.040 800 1800 8617.140 1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
1000 1400 8617.050 1000 1400 8617.150 the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.
1200 1200 8617.060 1200 1200 8617.160
1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of 1400 800 8617.170
the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data 1600 800 8617.180
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.
1800 800 8617.190
2000 700 8617.200
2200 650 8617.210
1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.

Punched section without mounting

flange, 23 x 64 mm (VX25, VX SE)
For enclosure
width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No.
mm
400 1125 8100.740
500 1125 8100.741
600 1125 8100.742
800 750 8100.743
1200 635 8100.745
1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.

18 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.3 Rail systems, horizontal installation Note:

– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX
Punched sections with mounting flanges, 18 x 64 mm,
23 x 64 mm, 23 x 89 mm and punched sections
without mounting flanges, 23 x 64 mm
Variable, with rows of holes for universal interior installation or partial
assembly. Simply locate into punchings and screw-fasten.

Punched section with mounting flange, Punched section with mounting flange, Punched section with mounting flange,
18 x 64 mm (VX25) 23 x 64 mm (VX25, VX SE) 23 x 89 mm, stainless steel (VX25, VX SE)
for the outer mounting level for the inner mounting level for the inner mounting level
For enclosure For enclosure For enclosure
width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No. width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No. width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No.
mm mm mm
300 600 8617.000 300 800 8617.100 400 420 8100.730
400 600 8617.010 400 800 8617.110 500 420 8100.731
500 600 8617.020 500 800 8617.120 600 420 8100.732
600 600 8617.030 600 800 8617.130 800 275 8100.733
800 380 8617.040 800 550 8617.140 1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
1000 240 8617.050 1000 340 8617.150 the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.
1200 140 8617.060 1200 170 8617.160
1) 1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement. only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.

Punched section without mounting

flange, 23 x 64 mm (VX25, VX SE)
For enclosure
width/height/depth F [N]1) Model No.
mm
400 1000 8100.740
500 1000 8100.741
600 1000 8100.742
800 400 8100.743
1200 170 8100.745
1)
The maximum admissible overall load capacity of
the enclosure must not be exceeded. Force data
only applies to a symmetrical arrangement.

Technical documentation/Load capacity 19

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.3 Rail systems For door width

F [N] Model No.
Punched section with mounting flange, 14 x 39 mm (VX25, VX SE) mm
For mounting on the tubular door frame. 400 500 8619.700
500 500 8619.710
600 500 8619.720
800 260 8619.730
1000 130 8619.750

Punched rail 18 x 39 mm (VX25, VX SE) For enclosure width/depth

F1 [N]1) F2 [N]1) Model No.
For variable, individual interior installation of the enclosure frame on mm
the inner mounting level, may also be used in conjunction with other 400 600 1500 8617.700
punched sections. Prepared at the rear to accommodate cable clamps 500 600 1500 8617.710
for optimum cable routing inside the enclosure.
600 600 1500 8617.720
Note:
800 600 1100 8617.730
– For VX SE in conjunction with adaptor rail VX
1)
The max. static load applied to the free-standing base assembly via the support
rails must not exceed 10,000 N in total. The maximum admissible overall load
capacity of the enclosure (15,000 N) must not be exceeded. Force data only
applies to an evenly distributed load.

20 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.3 Rail systems For enclosure Model No.

Support rail 75 x 20 mm (VX25, VX SE) width/depth F [N]1)
mm slotted unslotted
For heavy installed equipment, with mounting holes. Particularly suitable
for the installation of base isolators. 400 2600 4394.000 –
500 2100 4395.000 –
600 1750 4396.000 4396.500
800 1300 4398.000 4398.500
1)
The max. static load applied to the free-standing base assembly via the support
rails must not exceed 10,000 N in total. The maximum admissible overall load
capacity of the enclosure (15,000 N) must not be exceeded. Force data only
applies to an evenly distributed load.

Support rail 48 x 26 mm (VX25, VX SE) For enclosure width

For heavy installed equipment such as transformers. F [N]1) Model No.
mm
600 3000 8617.800
800 2250 8617.810
1000 1800 8617.820
1200 1500 8617.830
1)
The max. static load applied to the free-standing base assembly via the support
rails must not exceed 10,000 N in total. The maximum admissible overall load
capacity of the enclosure (15,000 N) must not be exceeded. Force data only
applies to an evenly distributed load.

Technical documentation/Load capacity 21

Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Installation variants

4.3 Rail systems Depth mm F [N] Model No.

System divider (VX25, VX SE) 600 3600 8620.901
Divides the enclosure width into two zones. For example, this allows
mounting plates, cable clamp rails or swing frames from 600 mm wide
enclosures to be fitted in 1200 mm wide enclosures.

Screw load (VX25, VX SE) Torx screw MA [Nm] Model No.

BZ 5.5 x 13 5 2486.600

F [N] Thread Model No.

M6 VX 4164.500
max. 1500 M8 VX 4165.500
M5 VX 4166.500
Max. 1250 N

Max. 1250 N

22 Technical documentation/Load capacity

 Enclosure systems VX25, VX SE
Notes

Technical documentation/Load capacity 23

◾ Enclosures
◾ Power Distribution
◾ Climate Control
◾ IT Infrastructure
◾ Software & Services

XWW00234EN2104

You can find the contact details of all

Rittal companies throughout the world here.

www.rittal.com/contact
 Abb. 1: Schnappbefestigung auf 35 mm-Tragschiene nach EN Abb. 2: Bereichseinengung Abb. 3: Anschlußschema
50 022 Fig. 2: Range restriction Fig. 3: Connection diagram
Fig. 1: Clip-on fastening on 35 mm support rail to Fig. 2: Réduction de la plage de température Fig. 3: Schéma de connexion
EN 50 022 Afb. 2: Instelling van het bereik Afb. 3: Aansluitschema
Fig. 1: Fixation par encliquetage sur rail porteur de Bild 2: Anslutningssättet Bild 3: Anslutningsschema
35 mm selon EN 50 022 Fig. 2: Limitazione di campo della temperatura Fig. 3: Schema di allacciamento
Afb. 1: Snapbevestiging op 35 mm montagerail Fig. 2: Ajuste del campo de temperatura Fig. 3: Esquema de conexión
volgens EN 50 022
Schaltschrank- Bild 1: Snäppfastsättning på 35 mm profilskena
temperaturregler enligt EN 50 022 Einstellbereich Regler
Fig. 1: Fissaggio a scatto su guida a 35 mm secondo EN 50 48V (L2*)
Enclosurethermostat 022 °F °C
Fig. 1: Clips de sujeción sobre guía soporte 60V 24V (L1*) 250V 115V
Régulatuer de température de 35 mm según EN 50 022 N N U P L N N
60
pour armoires électriques
131
Schakelkasttem- 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
peratuurregelaar
113
Apparatskåps-
40
temperaturregulator
95
Termostato per armadi per
quadri di comando 30
77
Termostato para armariosde
SK 3110.000 distribución 20

59
10
41 5
Montageanleitung 1 2 3 4 5 6
Assembly instructions Bereichseinengung im Einstellknopf
Notice de montage
Montage-instruktie
Montageanvisning
Istruzioni di montaggio
Instrucciones de montaje

Enclosures
Power Distribution
Climate Control
IT Infrastructure
Software & Services
U 468 931 012 946-2
5. Aufl. 12.2012 / Id-Nr. 232 588

RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1662 · D-35726 Herborn
Phone +49(0)2772 505-0 · Fax +49(0)2772 505-2319
E-mail: [email protected] · www.rittal.com
 (Cu, ein-/mehrdrähtig) Différence d’enclenchement: Montage Terminal:
Deutsch (max 2,5mm2) Français env. 1 K Svenska Snäppfastsättning av Español Diámetro del alambre AWG
Anzugsdrehmoment *Charge inductive 35 mm plintskena enligt EN 50 20…14 (Cu, rígidas, semirígi-
Dieses Gerät darf nur von aus- 0,45 Nm Seul le personnel qualifié est Denna enheft får endast instal- 022 se bild 1. La instalación de este aparato das) (2,5 mm2)
gebildetem Fachpersonal Schaltdifferenz: ca.1K autorisé à installer l’appareil Montage leras av utbildat personal enligt debe realizzarla exclusivamente Par de apriete 0,45 Nm
conformément au schéma de Inbyggnadsanvisning
gemäß dem Schaltbild Abb. 3 *induktive Last Fixation par encliquetage sur bild 3. Gällande säkerhetsföre- Montaget bör ske i horisontellt personal espezializado según el Histéresis:
installiert werden. Montage connexion, fig. 3. Les règles de rail porteur de 35 mm selon EN skrifter måste följas. För att diagrama de circuito de la figu- aprox. 1 K
sécurité existantes doivent être läge. Placeringen av termosta-
Dabei sind die bestehenden Schnappbefestigung auf 35- 50 022, uppnå skyddsklass II måste ten bör vara i den övre delen i ra 3. Se deben respetar todas *carga inductivam
scrupuleusement observées.
Sicherheitsvorschriften zu mm-Tragschiene nach EN voir fig. 1. erforderliga installationsåtgärder skåpet och så långt från värme- las normas de seguridad vigen- Montaje
Les mesures d’installation adé-
beachten. Um die 50 022 siehe Abb. 1, sowohl quates doivent être prises pour Remarque vidtagas. Denna självständiga, element och värmekällor som tes. Para alcanzar los requisitos Sujeción con clips a la guía
Anforderungen der waagerecht, als auch senkrecht satisfaire aux exigences de la Le montage se fera de préfé- elektroniska eller elektromeka- möjligt. För att garantera kopp- de la clase de protección II, se soporte de 35 mm según EN
Schutzklasse II zu erreichen, durch Versetzen der Klemm- classe de protection II. Cet rence en position horizontale. niska apparat är för reglering av lingsdifferensen på 1 K skall den tomarán las medidas adecua- 50 022 ver
müssen entsprechende feder. appareil électromécanique ou Installer le régulateur de tempé- temperatur i torra och slutna termiska återkopplingen anslu- das de instalación. Este dispo- fig. 1.
Installationsmaß nahmen ergrif- Hinweise électronique est conçu pour rature dans la partie supérieure utrymmen med normala förhål- tas. Anslutningssättet kan ses sitivo electrónicos o electrome-
fen werden. Dieses unabhängig réguler la température dans les landen. Apparaten motsvarar cánicos autónomo puede ser Indicaciones
Die Montage ist in horizontaler de l’armoire électrique en på bild 2. Es preferible realizar el montaje
montierbare elektronische oder locaux secs et fermés et dans norm EN 60730 och arbetar utilizado solamente para la
Lage vorzunehmen. Die Plazie- des conditions d’utilisation nor- l’écartant le plus possible des Garanti en posición horizontal. El
elektromechanische Gerät dient rung des Temperaturreglers resistances chauffantes pour enligt verkningssätt 1C regulación de la temperatura en
der Regelung der Temperatur males. Cet appareil est confor- Vi garanterar 1 års garanti vid estancias cerradas y secas en emplazamiento del termostato
sollte nach Möglichkeit diagonal me à la norme EN 60730 et armoires électriques et de Tekniskt uttförande fackmannamässigt användande debería ser en la parte superior
ausschließlich in trockenen und im oberen Schaltschrank- toutes les sources de dissipa- Utförande: condiciones normales. Este dis-
geschlossenen Räumen, mit fonctionne selon la Directive 1C. från leveransdatum. Inom positivo eléctrico cumple con la del armario a la máxima distan-
bereich mit größtmöglichem tion de chaleur. Pour garantir Bimetall som temperaturkän- denna tid kommer aggregatet cia posible de resistencias cale-
üblicher Umgebung. Dieses Abstand zu Schaltschrank- l’hystérésis d’enclenchement nande organ med termiskt åter- norma EN 60730, y funciona
Fabrication technique att repareras eller bytas ut kost- factoras y fuentes de evacua-
Gerät entspricht der EN 60730, Heizungen und Verlustwärme- de 1 K, il est nécessaire de gång. de acuerdo al modo 1C.
Fabrication: nadsfritt. ción de calor. Para garantizar
es arbeitet nach der quellen gewählt werden. Um brancher le retour thermique Descripción técnica
L’organe sensible à la chaleur una histéresis de conexión de
Wirkungsweise 1C. eine Schalthysterese von 1 K zu intégré à l’appareil. Pour réduire Kontaktbestyckning: Descripción:
est un régulateur bilame avec 1 K debe conectarse la
Technische Ausführung garantieren ist es erforderlich, retour thermique. la plage de température, se 1-polig växlandekontakt. Regulador con sensor térmico realimentación térmica.
Ausführung: die eingebaute thermische conformer aux indications de la Tillåten kontaktbestyckning: por bimetal conrealimentación El ajuste del campo de tempe-
Elément de contact:
Bimetallregler als temperatur- Rückführung anzuschließen. fig. 2. Uppvärmning U: térmica. ratura puede realizarse según
Contact unipolaire (inverseur)
empfindliches Organ mit ther- Die Bereichseinengung kann Garantie 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, Componentes del contacto: fig. 2.
comme élément de rupture
mischer Rückführung. entsprechend Abb. 2 vorge- Nous assurons sur l’appareil .—
. . 30 W 1 contacto conmutado. Datos
brusque.
Kontaktbestückung: nommen werden. Bei flexiblen utilisé correctement une garan- Kylning P: del contacto
Données admissibles pour le
1poliger Umschaltkontakt Anschlussleitungen (Litzen) sind tie de 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, admitidos: Garantía
contact:
Aderend hülsen zu verwenden. .—
. . 30 W
(Wechsler) als Sprungschaltglied Chauffage U: 1 an à compter du jour de la Poder de ruptura contacto Sobre esta unidad otorgamos 1
Zulässige Kontaktdaten: Garantie livraison. Durant cette période, Relativ fuktighet: max 95 % calefación U: año de garantía contado a par-
5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A,
Heizbetrieb U: Auf dieses Gerät gewähren wir un appareil renvoyé à nos ate- utan konden sation Terminales tir del día de suministro, siem-
.—
. . 30 W
Stötspänning: 4 KV
Klemme 5 – 3 1 Jahr Garantie bei fachge- Refroidissement P: liers sera réparé ou échangé 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, pre que su utilización se efec-
~10 (4*) A, rechter Anwendung vom Tage gratuitement. Temperatur för kultrycksprovet: .—
. . 30 W túe de forma correcta. Dentro
5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A,
.—
. . max. 30 W der Lieferung an. Innerhalb die- 75 ±2 °C Poder de ruptura contacto de este período la unidad
.—
. . 30 W
Kühlbetrieb P: ses Zeitraumes wird das einge- Spänning och ström för att condensación P: suministrada será reparado o
Humidité relative:
Klemme 5 – 4 schickte Gerät im Werk kosten- kontrollera EMK-störsändning: Terminales sustituida en fábrica gratuita-
max. 95% sans condensation
~ 5 (4*) A, los repariert oder ausgetauscht. 230 V; 0,1 A 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, mente.
Calculation impulse voltage: 4 KV
.—
. . max. 30 W Föroreningsklass: 2 .—
. . 30 W
Température d’essai du test de
Zul. rel. Raumfeuchte: Klämma: La humedad relativa admitida:
dureté de BRINELL: 75 ± 2 °C
max 95 %, nicht kondensierend Tråddiameter AWG 20…14 máx. 95 %, sin condensar
Intensité et tension nécessaires
Bemessungsstoßspannung: 4 KV (Cu, fast, fåtrådig) (2,5 mm2) Tensión de corriente asignada
à la mesure des interférences
Temperatur für die Åtdragningsmoment 4 KV
electromagnétiques (CEM):
Kugeldruckprüfung: 75 ± 2 °C 0,45 Nm Temperatura para ensayo de
230 V; 0,1 A
Spannung und Strom für Koppelingsdifferens: dureza Brinell: 75 ± 2 °C
Degré de pollution: 2
Zwecke der EMV-Störaussen- Ca. 1 K Tensión y corriente para control
Serrer:
dungsprüfungen: 230 V; 0,1 A *induktiv last de compatibilidad electromag-
Diamètre du fil AWG 20…14
Verschmutzungsgrad: 2 (Cu, solide, échoué) nética: 230 V; 0,1 A
Klemme: (2,5 mm2) Grado de poluciónmm: 2
Drahtdurchmesser Couple de serrage
AWG 20…14 0,45 Nm

Operational differential: Schakelhysteresis: 0,45 Nm

English Approx. 1 K Nederlands Ca. 1 K Italiano Differenza allo scatto:
*inductive load *Induktieve belasting Ca. 1K
This component must be Het apparaat mag alleen dor Questo apparecchio può esse- *carico induttivo
installed by fully trained person- Mounting vakkundige personen overeen- Montage re installato solo da personale
nel only, in accordance with Clip-on fastening on komstig afb. 3 geïnstalleerd Snapbevestiging op specializzato in base allo sche- Montaggio
wiring diagram fig. 3. 35 mm support rail to worden. De bekende veilig- 35 mm dinrail volgens ma di montaggio fig. 3, rispet- Fissaggio a scatto sulla guida
The existing safety regulations EN 50022, see fig. 1. heidsvoorschriften dienen in EN 50 022, zie afb. 1. tando le norme di sicurezza portante a 35 mm sec. EN 50
must be observed. Appropriate Notes acht genomen te worden. De Aanwijzing relative allo stesso. Vanno 022 vedi fig. 1.
installation measures must Mounting should preferably correcte installatie voorschriften De montage bijvoorkeur in hori- rispettate le norme di sicurezza Informazioni
be taken to achieve the be executed in the horizontal dienen te worden toegepast, zontale positie. Qua plaats zou vigenti. Per ottenere la classe di Si consiglia un’installazione
requirements of protection position. Wherever possible, the zodat aan de beschermings indien mogelijk de keuze moe- protezione II, vanno adottate orizzontale. Il termostato
class II. This independently thermostat should be placed in klasse II wordt voldaan. Dit ten vallen op het bovenste misure di installazione adeguate. dovrebbe essere installato pos-
mountable electromechanical the upper part of the enclosure onafhankelijk te plaatsen of gedeelte van de kast. Zo ver Questo dispositivo elettromec- sibilmente nella parte superiore
or electronic device is designed with maximum separation from monteren elektromechanisch of mogelijk verwijderd van scha- canico ed elettronico, che può dell’armadio; considerando una
for controlling the temperature the enclosure heaters and elektronisch apparaat, is ont- kelkastverwarmingen en andere essere montato separatamente, notevole distanza sia da riscal-
in dry and enclosed rooms only sources of heath losses. In worpen voor het regelen van bronnen met een grote warm- serve per la regolazione della datori anticondensa o da fonti
under normal conditions. The order to ensure a swtching temperatuur, alleen onder nor- te-afstraling. Om de schakel- temperatura esclusivamente in di dissipazione di calore. Per
device confirms to EN 60730, it overlap, it is necessary to con- male omstandigheden in droge hysteresis van 1 K te garande- ambienti asciutti e chiusi, in garantire unciclo di isteresi pari
works according operating nect the installed thermal feed- en afsluitbare ruimten. Deze ren is het noodzakelijk die inge- normali condizioni d'uso. Il a 1K è necessario collegare la
principle 1C. back. electronische regelaar voldoet bouwde thermische terugkop- dispositivo è conforme alla EN resistenza di retroazione termica.
Technical details Range restriction can be made aan EN 60730 en functioneert peling aan te sluiten. De instel- 60730, funziona secondo il Per la limitazione di campo
Construction: in accordance with fig. 2. volgens werk wijze 1C. ling van het bereik kan overeen- principio di funzionamento 1C. della temperatura fare riferimen-
Bimetallic controller as a tem- Guarantee komstig afb. 2 worden gereali- Esecuzione tecnica te alla fig. 2.
perature sensitive element with Technische uitvoering seerd. Esecuzione:
This unit is guaranteed for 1 Uitvoering: Garanzia
termal feedback. year, subject to correct usage Garantie Termostato ad elemento bime- Per questo apparecchio conce-
Bimetaalregelaar als tempera- tallico sensibile con retroazione
Contacts: from the date of delivery. Within tuurgevoelig orgaan met ther- Op dit apparaat garanderen wij diamo un anno di garanzia con
Single-pole changer as a that period, the returned unit 1 jaar garantie bij vakkundig termica. decorrenza dal giorno della for-
mische terugkoppeling. Contatto di commutazione a
quick-break switch. will be repaired in the factory or gebruik vanaf de dag van leve- nitura, per un impiego appro-
Permissible contact data: replaced free of charge. Kontaktuitvoering: ring. Binnen dit tijdsbestek Carico ammesso al contatto: priato e nelle condizioni previ-
For heating U: 1-polig wisselkontakt met wordt het retourgezonden Caldo morsetti U: ste. In caso di guasti entro tale
5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, schakelmoment. Toelaatbare apparaat kostenloos gereppa- 5 – 3 ~10 (4*) A, periodo di tempo l’apparecchio
.—
. . 30 W kontaktbelasting: reerd of uitgewisseld. .—
. . 30 W potrà essere inviato in fabbrica,
for cooling P: Verwarmen U: Freddo morsetti P: dove si eseguirà una riparazio-
5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, 5 – 3 ~ 10 (4*) A, 5 – 4 ~5 (4*) A, ne o una sostituzione gratuita.
.—
. . 30 W .—
. . 30 W .—
. . 30 W
Relative humidity: max. 95 % Koelen P: Umidità relativa:
without condensation 5 – 4 ~ 5 (4*) A, 95% max, senza condensa
Rated impulse voltage: 4 KV .—
. . 30 W Tensione nominale impulsiva:
Ball pressure test temperature: Toelaatbare relatieve vochtigheit: 4 KV
75 ± 2 °C max. 95%, geer. condensvorming Temperatura per la verifica di
Voltage and Current for the for Drieelektrische sterkte test: 4 KV durezza alla sfera: 75 ± 2 °C
purposes of interfernce Thermische kogeldruk test: Tensione e corrente per le verifi-
measurements: 230 V; 0.1 A 75 ± 2 °C che di compatibilità elettroma-
Pollution degree: 2 Spanning en stroom voor EMC gnetica: 230 V; 0,1 A
Clamp: imuniteit: 230 V; 0.1 A Grado di inquinamento: 2
Wire diameter AWG 20…14 Vervuilingsgraad: 2 Morsetti:
(Cu, solid, multistranded) (max Klem: Diametro del filo AWG 20…14
2.5 mm2) Draaddiameter AWG 20…14 (Cu, solido, flessibile) (2,5 mm2)
Tightening torque 0.45 Nm (Cu, solide, gestrande) (2,5 mm2) Coppia di serraggio
Aanhaalmoment 0,45 Nm
 FiHterHÛfter
FaJaJdfiHter uJit
VeJtiHateur à fiHtre
VeJtiHatKr
FiHterfHÇGt
VeJtiHatKrefiHtrK
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK

3237xxx 3241xxx
3238xxx 3243xxx
3239xxx 3244xxx
3240xxx 3245xxx

*KJtage IJstaHHatiKJs uJd BedieJuJgsaJHeituJg

AsseIbHy aJd KperatiJg iJstructiKJs
+Ktice d’eIpHKi d’iJstaHHatiKJ et de IKJtage
*KJtage eJ bedieJiJgshaJdHeidiJg
*KJtage Kch haJteriJgsaJvisJiJg
IstruViKJi di IKJtaggiK e fuJViKJaIeJtK
IJstrucciKJes de IKJtaFe y fuJciKJaIieJtK
µJdice
ES
1 ,bservactiKJes refereJtes 5 ReaHiVar Ha iJstaHaciÔJ
a Ha dKcuIeJtaciÔJ           4 eHËctrica                    9
11 DKcuIeJtKs reHaciKJadKs    4 51 IJstaHar Ha fueJte
12 CKJservaciÔJ de aHiIeJtaciÔJ            9
de Ha dKcuIeJtaciÔJ        4 52 Girar Ha cKJexiÔJ
13 SÏIbKHKs utiHiVadKs         4 de teJsiÔJ                 9
53 *KdificaciÔJ de Ha direcciÔJ
2 IJdicaciKJes de seguridad     5 de sKpHadK deH aire         10

3 DescripciÔJ deH aparatK       5 6 Puesta eJ serviciK           10

31 FuJciKJaIieJtK            5
3.1.1 Elementos básicos . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 *KJtaFe y sustituciÔJ
3.1.2 Regulación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 deH fiHtrK                   10
3.1.3 Dispositivos de seguridad . . . . 6
3.1.4 Esteras filtrantes . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 IJspecciÔJ y IaJteJiIieJtK  11
32 UtiHiVaciÔJ cKJfKrIe a Ha
JKrIativa                  6
9 AHIaceJaIieJtK y recicHaFe   11
33 UJidad de eJvase           6

10 DatKs tËcJicKs              12
4 *KJtaFe y cKJexiÔJ           7
41 SeHecciÔJ deH Hugar
de ubicaciÔJ               7 11 *edidas escKtaduras
42 ,bservaciKJes sKbre taHadrKs                   16
eH IKJtaFe                 7
4.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 12 VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
4.2.2 Montaje de los componentes FiHtrK de saHida E*C         17
electrónicos en el armario. . . . . 7
43 *KJtaFe deH veJtiHadKr cKJ 13 EsqueIas de cKJexiÔJ      18
fiHtrK y eH fiHtrK de saHida      7
4.3.1 Realizar escotaduras
14 DecHaraciÔJ de
en el armario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.2 Montaje del ventilador
cKJfKrIidad CE            20
con filtro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
44 ,bservaciKJes sKbre Ha
iJstaHaciÔJ eHËctrica         8
4.4.1 Datos de conexión . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.4.2 Protección contra
sobretensiones y
carga de la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.4.3 Conexión puesta a tierra . . . . . . 9

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 3

 1 Observaciones referentes a la documentación
1 ,bservaciKJes refereJtes 1.3 Símbolos utilizados
ES a Ha dKcuIeJtaciÔJ
Estas instrucciones estan dirigidas a
„
EH puJtK de avisK Iuestra
– operarios familiarizados con el montaje
que debe reaHiVar uJa acciÔJ
y la instalación del ventilador con filtro
– técnicos familiarizados con el manejo
del ventilador con filtro

1.1 Documentos relacionados ĵPeHigrK!

Para los tipos de aparatos aquí descritos ĵPeHigrK de sufrir
existe documentación en papel con las daÒKs cKrpKraHes!
instrucciones de montaje, instalación y
mando y/o un CD-ROM adjunto.
No nos hacemos responsables de los da-
ños ocasionados por el incumplimiento ĵAteJciÔJ!
de estas instrucciones. Si se diera el caso PKsibHe riesgK para eH
también tienen validez las instrucciones prKductK y eH IediK
de los accesorios utilizados. aIbieJte

1.2 Conservación de la
documentación +KtaĮ
Estas instrucciones así como todos los Informaciones útiles
documentos adjuntos son parte del pro- y observaciones.
ducto. Así pues deben ser entregados al
técnico de la instalación. Este deberá
hacerse cargo de su conservación y
disponibilidad.

4 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 2 IJdicaciKJes de seguridad
2 IJdicaciKJes de 3 DescripciÔJ deH aparatK
seguridad Según el tipo de aparato el aspecto del ES
Tenga en cuenta las siguientes indicacio- ventilador puede diferir de las imágenes
nes de seguridad durante el montaje y mostradas en este manual. Aunque el fun-
manejo del aparato: cionamiento en principio siempre es igual.
– El montaje, la instalación y el manteni-
miento únicamente debe realizarlo per- 3
sonal técnico especializado 1
– La entrada y salida de aire del ventila-
dor con filtro en el interior y exterior del
armario debe estar libre de obstáculos 4 2
(ver también apartado «4.2.2 Montaje
de los componentes electrónicos en el
armario», página 7)
– La potencia de pérdida de los compo- 5
nentes instalados en el armario no debe
superar el caudal de aire específico del
ventilador con filtro
Imagen 1: Descripción del aparato
– Las rejillas deben orientarse siempre
con la parte abierta hacia abajo )eyeJda
– Utilice exclusivamente recambios y 1 Logotipo
accesorios originales (desbloqueo rejilla)
– No realice modificaciones en el ventila- 2 Rejilla
dor con filtro que no se encuentre 3 Caja del filtro con estera filtrante
descritas en estas instrucciones u 4 Caja del ventilador
otras adjuntas al aparato 5 Conexión eléctrica, variable
– La conexión a red del ventilador con
filtro únicamente debe realizarse en 3.1 Funcionamiento
modo libre de tensión. Debe preverse El ventilador con filtro en combinación con
el fusible indicado en la placa de los filtros de salidas correspondientes se
características utiliza para disipar el calor de pérdida de
– La modificación de la dirección de los armarios de distribución, para ventilar
impulsión del aire únicamente debe el armario y para proteger los componen-
realizarse en modo libre de tensión tes sensibles al calor. Esto se consigue
– La modificación de la posición de la mediante la entrada directa de aire am-
conexión a red únicamente debe biental, que debe estar a una temperatura
realizarse en modo libre de tensión inferior a la temperatura interior admisible
– No tocar las aspas del ventilador del armario. El sistema se monta en esco-
mientras está girando taduras premecanizadas.
– La conexión eléctrica, así como las
reparaciones deben ser realizadas 311 EHeIeJtKs bÄsicKs
por personal autorizado El ventilador con filtro consta de cuatro
componentes básicos: Motor del ventila-
dor, caja del filtro, rejilla con logotipo y
medio filtrante.

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 5

 3 DescripciÔJ deH aparatK
312 ReguHaciÔJ
ES A través del termostato (Referencia
3110.000), el indicador digital de tempera-
+KtaĮ
El caudal de aire se reduce.
tura (Referencia 3114.200), el control de la Se requieren esteras filtrantes
velocidad según la temperatura (Referen- especiales para los ventilado-
cia 3120.200, 3235.440, 3235.450) y/o el res con filtro EMC (ver acceso-
higrostato (Referencia 3118.000) se consi- rios).
gue una mayor eficiencia de los ventilado-
res con filtro Rittal. 3.2 Utilización conforme a la
normativa
+KtaĮ Los ventiladores con filtro de Rittal han
La unidad de mando 3120.200 sido desarrollados y construidos según el
sólo puede utilizarse en apara- estado de la técnica y la normativa vigen-
tos c.a. monofásicos. Las uni- te de seguridad. A pesar de ello pueden
dades de mando 3235.440 y causar daños físicos en personas y daños
3235.450 sólo pueden utilizar- materiales si no se utilizan de forma ade-
se en ventiladores con filtro con cuada. El aparato se ha diseñado exclusi-
interfaz de mando integrada vamente para la ventilación de armarios
(ventiladores con filtro EC y con de distribución y cajas para electrónica.
protección EMC a partir de un No se aceptan otras aplicaciones. El
caudal de aire de 180 m³/h. fabricante no se hace responsable de los
Ref. 3240.500/600, 3241.500/ daños causados por una aplicación, un
600, 3243.500/600, 3244.500/ montaje y una instalación inadecuadas.
600, 3245.500/600). El usuario deberá asumir el riesgo.
Por utilización adecuada se entiende tam-
bién el conocimiento de los documentos
313 DispKsitivKs de seguridad
adjuntos, así como el cumplimiento de las
El ventilador está equipado con dispositi-
condiciones de mantenimiento.
vos térmicos de protección del devanado
para la protección contra sobrecarga e
incluso contra sobrecalentamiento. En los 3.3 Unidad de envase
ventiladores trifásicos la protección del El ventilador se suministra en una unidad
devanado se encuentra en el punto neutro de embalaje completamente montado y a
del motor. punto de conexión.
Compruebe si la unidad de envase está
314 Esteras fiHtraJtes completa:
El ventilador con filtro/filtro de salida se
suministra con una estera filtrante están- +a DeJKIiJaciÔJ
dar instalada. Según el volumen de polvo
1 Ventilador con filtro
deberá controlar el filtro regularmente y en
caso necesario sustituirlo. 4 – Tornillos de fijación
A fin de aumentar el grado de protección y (no suministrados en 3237.1xx
en caso de polvo con un grano mayor a a 3239.1xx)
10 μm recomendamos la utilización de 1 – Instrucciones de montaje,
esteras filtrantes. instalación y mando
1 Esquema de taladros,
autoadhesivo
1 Estera filtrante estándar o EMC
Tab. 1: Unidad de envase

6 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 4 *KJtaFe y cKJexiÔJ
4 *KJtaFe y cKJexiÔJ 422 *KJtaFe de HKs cKIpKJeJtes
eHectrÔJicKs eJ eH arIariK
Ponga atención en el flujo de aire produci-
ES
4.1 Selección del lugar de
do por los sopladores propios de los com-
ubicación ponentes electrónicos. Durante la instala-
Tenga en cuenta las siguientes indicacio- ción debe garantizarse que el flujo de aire
nes al seleccionar el lugar de ubicación del ventilador y de los componentes elec-
del armario: trónicos no se influyan de forma negativa
– El lugar de ubicación del armario y la (cortocircuito de aire). Deben mantenerse
colocación del ventilador con filtro debe las distancias mínimas necesarias entre el
garantizar una buena ventilación ventilador y los componentes, con el fin de
– El lugar de ubicación debe estar exento garantizar una óptima circulación del aire.
de suciedad y humedad excesiva
– El ventilador con filtro deberá montarse 4.3 Montaje del ventilador y el filtro
siempre sobre piezas planas verticales
de salida
(puerta o paredes)
El ventilador y el filtro de salida deben
– La temperatura ambiente debe ser
montarse sobre una pieza plana vertical
inferior a la temperatura admisible en el
del armario:
interior del armario
„ Para ello deberá recortar la puerta, el la-
– Los datos de conexión a la red deben
teral o el dorsal del armario según el es-
coincidir con los indicados en la placa
quema de taladros incluido en la unidad
de características del aparato
de envase.
En general siempre se monta el ventilador
4.2 Observaciones sobre el con filtro en el espacio inferior del armario
montaje y el filtro de salida en el espacio superior.

421 GeJeraH 431 ReaHiVar escKtaduras eJ eH arIariK

– Compruebe que el embalaje no presen- „ Fije el esquema de taladros autoadhesi-
te desperfectos. Todo desperfecto en el vo sobre el punto de montaje previsto
embalaje puede ser causa de un fallo de en la puerta, lateral o dorsal del armario.
funcionamiento posterior El esquema incluye líneas de medidas
– Para garantizar la renovación del aire para la escotadura y los taladros para rea-
deben montarse el ventilador con filtro y lizar el montaje y la fijación del ventilador
un filtro de salida por armario (necesarias sólo en chapas con un grosor
de > 2,5 mm). Ver también las imágenes 8
y 9, pág. 16.
+KtaĮ
El filtro de salida debe tener
como mínimo el mismo tamaño ĵRiesgK de HesiKJes!
que el ventilador con filtro. Desbarbe tKdas Has escKtadu
ras para evitar HesiKJes prK
– El armario debe ser estanco por los to- ducidas pKr caJtKs afiHadKs
dos los lados (IP 54). De no ser asi exis-
te la posibilidad, según la dirección de „ Recorte las escotaduras incluyendo la
soplado del ventilador, que penetre aire anchura de la línea según la plantilla de
sin filtrar, contaminado en el armario taladros.
– En caso de ensamblaje vertical de los Desbarbe las escotaduras.
ventiladores con filtro debería mantener-
se una distancia de separación de
15 mm (de esquema de taladros a
esquema de taladros). Sólo de esta for-
ma puede garantizarse una abertura sin
problemas de la rejilla.

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 7

 4 *KJtaFe y cKJexiÔJ
432 *KJtaFe deH veJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK – IP 55 utilizando una estera filtrante fina
ES – El ventilador se monta con una sencilla
fijación a presión en la escotadura de
adicional o una cubierta contra agua a
presión.
montaje sin necesidad de herramientas – IP 56 utilizando una cubierta contra
– Compruebe que los picos de retención agua a presión.
se encuentren en la posición correcta
para garantizar una sujeción segura
+KtaĮ
– A partir de un grosor de chapa de
> 2 mm deberían presionarse los picos Para aumentar el grado de pro-
de retención uno a uno tección de los ventiladores con
– A partir de un grosor de chapa de filtro y filtros de salida debe uti-
> 2,5 mm debe realizarse un atornillado lizarse una estera filtrante fina
adicional del ventilador con filtro adicional o una cubierta contra
– Para realizar los taladros inferiores, agua a presión.
debe retirarse la rejilla según se muestra
en la imagen 2 4.4 Observaciones sobre la
instalación eléctrica
3237.xxx
3238.xxx Durante la instalación electrónica tenga en
cuenta todas las normativas nacionales y
regionales vigentes, así como la normati-
va industrial. La instalación eléctrica debe
realizarla personal técnico autorizado, que
será el responsable de cumplir las norma-
tivas.

441 DatKs de cKJexiÔJ

3239.xxx – La tensión y frecuencia de conexión
3240.xxx debe coincidir con los valores nomina-
3241.xxx
3243.xxx les indicados en la placa de característi-
3244.xxx cas
3245.xxx
– La conexión eléctrica y las reparacio-
nes deben ser realizadas por personal
autorizado.
Utilizar únicamente recambios originales
– Instale como protección contra cortocir-
cuitos en ventiladores 1~ y 24 V (c.c.) el
Imagen 2: Desmontar la rejilla
cortacircuito fusible indicado en la pla-
ca de características (magnetotérmico o
– La fijación con tornillos del ventilador es fusible)
imprescindible si se realiza un transpor- – En la ejecución trifásica debe instalarse
te, con el fin de evitar la caída fuera de como protección de la línea y contra cor-
la escotadura. tocircuitos el cortacircuito fusible o el
– En el caso del motor del ventilador se disyuntor/guardamotor especificado en
trata de un componente giratorio, que la placa de características ajustándolo
puede transmitir oscilaciones y vibracio- al valor nominal indicado
nes. El instalador deberá tomar las me- – La dirección de giro y del caudal de aire
didas constructivas necesarias para está indicada sobre la caja del motor
evitar el desacoplamiento a causa de mediante una flecha
las oscilaciones. – En caso de ausencia de una fase el
– Con la incorporación de los siguientes ventilador no se pondrá en marcha.
accesorios puede aumentarse el grado Si el campo giratorio es incorrecto el
de protección: ventilador funcionará al revés

8 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 5 ReaHiVar Ha iJstaHaciÔJ eHËctrica
442 PrKtecciÔJ cKJtra sKbreteJsiKJes
y carga de Ha red
El aparato no dispone de protección pro-
ĵAteJciÔJ!
EJ casK de JK utiHiVar IaJ
ES
pia contra sobretensión. El propietario de guitKs terIiJaHes aisHe HKs
la instalación deberá adoptar las medidas hiHKs IÄx 9 II (IaJteJieJ
necesarias en la red de alimentación con dK Has distaJcias de aire y de
protección activa contra rayos y sobreten- descarga)
sión. La tensión de red no debe superar la
tolerancia de ±10 %. „ Volver a colocar la cubierta de la
conexión eléctrica.
443 CKJexiÔJ puesta a tierra
La conexión de puesta a tierra debe estar
conectada al sistema de puesta a tierra de +KtaĮ
todo el sistema. En el ventilador con filtro
3237.xxx la conexión se realiza
a través de 2 hilos simples,
5 ReaHiVar Ha iJstaHaciÔJ conducidos fuerta del aparato.

eHËctrica 5.2 Girar la conexión de tensión

Si la posición de la conexión de tensión no
5.1 Instalar la fuente de permite un acceso óptimo es posible girar-
alimentación la en pasos de 90º. Para ello deberá pre-
„ Complete la instalación eléctrica en sionarse el botón de desbloqueo del cie-
base a los esquemas electrónicos. rre de bayoneta situado en el dorsal del
ventilador. En los aparatos 3238.xxx a
3239.xxx el desbloqueo se realiza tirando
+KtaĮ
de la lengüeta (ver imagen 4) del cierre de
Datos técnicos bayoneta.
véase placa de características.
3238.xxx
„ Retirar la cubierta roja de la conexión
3239.xxx
eléctrica.

Imagen 4: Desbloqueo del cierre de bayoneta

En los aparatos 3240.xxx, 3241.xxx,

3243.xxx a 3245.xxx el desbloqueo se
realiza presionando sobre el botón de
Imagen 3: Acceso a la conexión eléctrica desbloqueo del cierre de bayoneta (ver
imagen 5). Este se encuentra en la
„ Introduzca el cable de conexión con esquina opuesta al borne de conexión.
manguitos terminales en los bornes
elásticos. Seleccionar la sección del
conductor en función del cortocircuito
(2 x 0,75 – 2,5 mm² multifilar,
2 x 1,5 – 2,5 mm² soldadura de hilo
fino).
Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 9
 6 Puesta eJ serviciK
7 *KJtaFe y sustituciÔJ deH
ES fiHtrK
El ventilador con filtro y el filtro de salida
incluyen de serie una estera filtrante están-
dar para el filtrado previo de partículas
grandes de polvo seco y pelusas presen-
tes en el aire ambiental. A fin de aumentar
el grado de protección y en caso de polvo
con un grano < 10 μm recomendamos la
utilización de esteras filtrantes (disponi-
bles opcionalmente).
Según el volumen de polvo deberá contro-
Imagen 5: Desbloqueo del cierre de bayoneta
lar el filtro regularmente (recomendamos
realizar el control transcurridas 2000 ho-
5.3 Modificación de la dirección de ras de servicio) y en caso necesario susti-
soplado del aire tuirlo.
La dirección de soplado de serie es me-
diante presión del exterior al interior del +KtaĮ
armario. Modificar la dirección de soplado Utilice exclusivamente filtros
por motivos técnicos (espacio, componen- originales de Rittal con el mar-
tes específicos de guiado del aire, etc.) caje Rittal para así garantizar el
es muy sencillo. Para ello deberá desblo- grado de protección, el caudal
quearse la caja del ventilador y girarla de aire y la homologación.
180º. Para el desbloqueo deberá proce-
derse como en «5.2 Girar la conexión de
tensión», página 9. ĵRiesgK de HesiKJes!
Rogamos tenga en cuenta también las ob- Sustituir Ha estera fiHtraJte
servaciones en «4.2.1 General», página 7. ÙJicaIeJte cKJ eH rKdete
deH veJtiHadKr paradK
+K iJtrKducir Ha IaJK eJ eH
6 Puesta eJ serviciK rKdete
El ventilador con filtro trabaja de forma Para montar o sustituir la unidad proceda
automática, es decir, después de la de la forma siguiente(dirección de sopla-
conexión de la fuente de alimentación se do: desde el exterior del armario al interior):
pondrá en marcha el ventilador.
„ Para desbloquear la rejilla mueva el
En función del modelo están disponibles logotipo con el dedo un poco hacia
las siguientes variantes de tensión: arriba (ver imagen 6)
– 24 V, c.c. „ Tras el desbloqueo podrá abatir la reji-
– 115 V, 1~ lla aprox. unos 70º o 90º hacia abajo
– 230 V, 1~ „ Introduzca ahora en caso necesario la
– 400/460 V, 3 fases estera filtrante fina en la caja
„ Compruebe que la cara rasposa se
encuentre en dirección a la rejilla
„ Introduzca a continuación la estera
filtrante estándar suministrada con la
unidad de envase
„ Compruebe también ahora que la cara
rasposa (sin el marcaje Rittal) se
encuentre en dirección a la rejilla
(ver imagen 7)
„ Presione ahora la rejilla sobre la caja,
hasta oir como encaja
10 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal
 8 IJspecciÔJ y IaJteJiIieJtK
El ventilador instalado libre de manteni-
miento dispone de cojinetes de fricción
(3237.xxx, 3238.xxx y 3239.xxx) o cojine-
ES
tes de bolas (3240.xxx, 3241.xxx, 3243.xxx
hasta 3245.xxx), con protección contra
la humedad y el polvo y provisto de un
dispositivo de vigilancia de la temperatura.
La vida útil es como mínimo de 40.000 ho-
ras de servicio (L10, 40°C). Por tanto, el
ventilador con filtro no requiere apenas
mantenimiento.
Los componentes pueden limpiarse de vez
en cuando, según la suciedad acumulada,
Imagen 6: Desbloqueo de la rejilla
con un aspirador o aire comprimido.
La limpieza de suciedad aceitosa puede
realizarse con detergentes no inflamables,
por ej. detergentes en frío.

cara rasposa
cara sin el
ĵAteJciÔJ!
marcaje Rittal ĵRiesgK de queIaduras!
+K utiHice HÏquidKs iJfHaIa
bHes para reaHiVar Ha HiIpieVa

Sucesión de los trabajos de mantenimiento:

– Determinación del grado de suciedad
– ¿El filtro está sucio?
Sustituir el filtro.
– ¿Las aletas del ventilador están sucias?
Imagen 7: Montar la estera filtrante estándar
Limpiar.
– Comprobar el nivel de ruido de los
+KtaĮ ventiladores
En caso de modificación de la – Limpieza mediante aire comprimido
dirección de soplado del aire
(ver 5.3, «Modificación de la
dirección de soplado del aire», 9 AHIaceJaIieJtK y
página 10) el montaje se realiza
a la inversa. recicHaFe

ĵAteJciÔJ!
8 IJspecciÔJ y ĵRiesgK de daÒKs!
EH veJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK JK
IaJteJiIieJtK debe expKJerse a teIperatu
ras superiKres a HKs 70aC Ji
ĵPeHigrK de descargas iJferiKres a HKs 30aC duraJ
eHËctricas! te su aHIaceJaIieJtK
EH aparatK se eJcueJtra baFK
teJsiÔJ La evacuación también puede ser
DescKJecte aJtes de abrir Ha efectuada en la fábrica de Rittal.
fueJte de aHiIeJtaciÔJ y prK Consúltenos.
tËgaHa cKJtra uJa Jueva pues
ta eJ Iarcha iJvKHuJtaria

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 11

 10 DatKs tËcJicKs
10 DatKs tËcJicKs
ES – La tensión y frecuencia de conexión – Mantenga el prefusible según datos de
deben coincidir con los valores de la la placa de características
placa de características

UJidad RefereJcia
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
– 3237100 3237110 3237124 3238100 3238110 3238124
RA) 7035
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
– 3237108 3237118 - 3238108 3238118 -
RA) 9005

VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK

– 3237600 – – 3238600 – –
E*C RA) 7035

V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,

Tensión de servicio 24 (c.c.) 24 (c.c.)
Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Intensidad máx. A 0,065/0,052 0,12/0,1 0,125 0,12/0,11 0.24/0.22 0,24
Absorción de potencia W 11/9 3 19/18 5.5
Elemento previo de
A 2
fusible T
Dimensiones
5
Ancho(B1)xAltura(H1) mm 116,5 x 116,5 148,5 x 148,5
Escotadura de monta-
mm 92 x 92 124 x 124
je necesaria (B2 x H2)
Profundidad (T1) mm 16
Profundidad
mm 43 58.5
máx. de montaje (T2)
Caudal de aire soplado
m³/h 20/25 20 55/66 55
libre
Caudal de aire con 1 x 3237.200: 15/18 1 x 3238.200: 43/50
filtro de salida incl.
estera filtrante m³/h
estándar – 2 x 3238.200: 46/56

FiHtrK de saHida RAL 7035 3237200 3238200

FiHtrK de saHida RAL 9005 3237208 3238208

FiHtrK de saHida E*C 3237060 3238060

RA) 7035

, Axial,motor Axial, motor Axial,motor

Ventilador – Axial motor de de corriente de de corriente
autoarranque continua autoarranque continua
Nivel de ruido dB (A) 38/43 38 46/49 46
Temperatura de
°C -15…+55
servicio
Temperatura de
°C -30…+70
almacenaje
IP 54 estándar
IP 54 estándar
IP 55 con estera filtrante fina
IP 55 con cubierta contra agua a
Grado de protección adicional o cubierta contra agua
– presión
(según IEC 60 529) a presión
IP 56 con cubierta contra agua a
IP 56 con cubierta contra agua a
presión
presión
Tab. 2: Datos técnicos Se reserva el derecho a realizar cambios técnicos.

12 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 10 DatKs tËcJicKs
UJidad RefereJcia
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
– 3239100 3239110 3239124
ES
RA) 7035
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
– 3239108 3239118 -
RA) 9005
VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
- 3239600
EMC RAL 7035
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Tensión de servicio 24 (c.c.)
Hz 50/60 50/60
Intensidad máx. A 0.12/0.11 0.24/0.22 0.23
Absorción de potencia W 19/18 5.5
Elemento previo de
A 2
fusible T
Dimensiones
Ancho (B1) x Altura (H1) mm 204 x 204
Escotadura de montaje
mm 177 x 177
necesaria (B2 x H2)
Profundidad (T1) mm 24
Profundidad máx. de
mm 90
montaje (T2)
Caudal de aire soplado
m³/h 105/120 105
libre
1 x 3239.200: 87/100
Caudal de aire con filtro
de salida incl. estera m³/h 2 x 3239.200: 93/108
filtrante estándar
1 x 3240.200: 98/111
FiHtrK de saHida – 3239200

FiHtrK de saHida E*C – 3239060

Axial, motor Axial,
Ventilador – de motor de corriente
autoarranque continua
Nivel de ruido dB (A) 46/49 46
Temperatura de servicio °C -15…+55
Temperatura de
°C -30…+70
almacenaje
IP 54 estándar
Grado de protección IP 55 con estera filtrante fina adicional o cubierta contra agua a
–
(según IEC 60 529) presión
IP 56 con cubierta contra agua a presión
Tab. 3: Datos técnicos Se reserva el derecho a realizar cambios técnicos.

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 13

 10 DatKs tËcJicKs
UJidad RefereJcia
ES VeJtiHadKr cKJ
– 3240100 3240110 3240124 3241100 3241110 3241124
fiHtrK RA) 7035
VeJtiHadKr cKJ
– 3240108 3240118 - 3241108 3241118 -
fiHtrK RA) 9005

VeJtiHadKr cKJ
fiHtrK E*C – 3240600 – – 3241600 – –
RA) 7035
V 230, 1~, 115, 1~, 230, 1~, 115, 1~,
Tensión de servicio 24 (c.c.) 24 (c.c.)
Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Intensidad máx. A 0,21/0,19 0,42/0,38 0,43 0,26/0,24 0,52/0,48 0,8
Absorción de
W 35/34 10 40/42 40/42 19
potencia
Elemento previo de
A 2 4 2 4 2
fusible T
Dimensiones
Ancho (B1) x
mm 255 x 255
Altura (H1)
Escotadura de
montaje necesaria mm 224 x 224
(B2 x H2)
Profundidad (T1) mm 25
Profundidad máx.
mm 107
de montaje (T2)
Caudal de aire
m³/h 180/160 180 230/250 230
soplado libre
Caudal de aire 1 x 3240.200: 138/121 1 x 3240.200: 183/205
con filtro de salida
m³/h 2 x 3240.200: 165/140 2 x 3240.200: 203/230
incl. estera filtrante
estándar 1 x 3243.200: 165/140 1 x 3243.200: 203/230
FiHtrK de saHida – 3240200
RAL 7035
FiHtrK de saHida – 3240208
RAL 9005
FiHtrK de saHida
– 3240060
E*C RAL 7035

Diagonal, Diagonal,
Diagonal, motor de Diagonal, motor de
Ventilador –
motor de autoarranque corriente motor de autoarranque corriente
continua continua
Nivel de ruido dB (A) 51/46 51 54/56 54
Temperatura de
°C -30…+55
servicio
Temperatura de
°C -30…+70
almacenaje
Grado de IP 54 estándar
protección – IP 55 con estera filtrante fina adicional o cubierta contra agua a presión
(según IEC 60 529) IP 56 con cubierta contra agua a presión
Tab. 4: Datos técnicos Se reserva el derecho a realizar cambios técnicos.

14 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 10 DatKs tËcJicKs
UJi
dad
RefereJcia
ES
VeJtiHadKr cKJ
fiHtrK RA) 7035 3243.100 3243.110 3244.100 3244.110 3244.140 3245.500 3245.510
VeJtiHadKr cKJ
fiHtrK RA) 9005 3243.108 3243.118 3244.108 3244.118 - 3245.508 3245.518
VeJtiHadKr cKJ
fiHtrK E*C RA) 7035 3243.600 3244.600 – – 3245.600 –

230, 115, 230, 115, 400/460, 200…240, 100…130,

Tensión de V
1~, 1~, 1~, 1~, 3~, 1~, 1~,
servicio Hz
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
0.37/
Intensidad máx. A 0.78/0.8 0.43/0.6 0.9/1.25 0.17/0.21 1.33 2.1
0.39
Absorción de
W 70/87 75/90 95/135 100/145 93/140 165 165
potencia
Elemento previo Guarda-
A 4 6 4 6 4 6
de fusible T motor
Dimensiones
Ancho (B1) x
mm 323 x 323
Altura (H1)
Escotadura de
montaje necesaria mm 292 x 292
(B2 x H2)
Profundidad (T1) mm 25
Profundidad máx.
mm 118,5 130.5 130.5
de montaje (T2)
Caudal de aire
m³/h 550/600 700/770 900
soplado libre

Caudal de aire con 1 x 3243.200: 1 x 3243.200: 1 x 3243.200:

filtro de salida incl. 465/510 544/587 680
m³/h
estera filtrante 2 x 3243.200: 2 x 3243.200: 2 x 3243.200:
estándar 508/548 630/690 820
FiHtrK de saHida RAL 7035 3243.200
FiHtrK de saHida RAL 9005 3243.208
FiHtrK de saHida
3243.060
EMC RAL 7035
Diagonal,
Diagonal, motor de Diagonal,
Ventilador –
motor de arranque por condensador corriente motor EC
trifásica
Nivel de ruido dB (A) 59/61 65/66 67/70 72
Temperatura de
°C -30…+55
servicio
Temperatura de
°C -30…+70
almacenaje

Grado de IP 54 estándar
IP 55 con estera filtrante fina adicional o cubierta IP 52 con estera
protección
– contra agua a presión filtrante fina adicional
(según IEC 60
IP 56 con cubierta contra agua a presión IP 56 con cubierta con-
529) IP 51 estándar tra agua a presión
Tab. 5: Datos técnicos Se reserva el derecho a realizar cambios técnicos.

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 15

 11 *edidas escKtadurastaHadrKs
11 *edidas escKtaduras
ES taHadrKs
+KtaĮ
A partir de un cierto grosor de
pared debe realizarse una es-
cotadura mayor (ver esquema
adjunto).
B2

T2

RefereJcia B2 x H2 II T2 II
T1
3237xxx 92 x 92 43
3238xxx 124 x 124 58,5
H2
3239xxx 177 x 177 90
3240xxx 224 x 224 107
3241xxx
H1

224 x 224 107

B1
3243xxx 292 x 292 118,5
3244xxx 292 x 292 130,5
3245xxx 292 x 292 130,5
Imagen 8: Medidas escotadura
Tab. 6: Medidas escotadura
B = Anchura, H = Altura, T = Profundidad

RefereJcia m II F II

3237xxx 3,5 100.5

3238xxx 3.5 132.5
3239xxx 4,5 185
3240xxx 4,5 234
3241xxx 4,5 234
3243xxx 4,5 302
3244xxx 4,5 302
3245xxx 4,5 302
Tab. 7: Medidas taladros

Imagen 9: Plantilla de taladros

16 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

12 Ventilador con filtro/Filtro de salida EMC
12 VeJtiHadKr cKJ fiHtrK
FiHtrK de saHida E*C ES
Para lograr la protección EMC, los ventila-
dores EMC y los filtros EMC de salida
deben ser encajados en el interior de la
escotadura de montaje y atornillados
utilizando los tornillos suministrados.
A continuación cubrir todo el contorno de
la unión del ventilador con filtro a la cara
interior del armario desde el interior con
las 4 láminas de contacto adhesivas,
según se muestra en la siguiente imagen.

Imagen 10: Láminas de contacto EMC

+KtaĮ
La protección EMC únicamen-
te se garantiza con el uso de
medios filtrantes EMC de Rittal
originales
(Ref. 3237.066, 3238.066,
3239.066, 3240.066, 3243.066).

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 17

 13 EsqueIas de cKJexiÔJ
13 EsqueIas de cKJexiÔJ
ES
M M M
1~ 1~ 1~

L N PE L N PE L N P

3237.100/.110/.600 3243.100/.110/.600 3245.500/.510/.600

3238.100/.110/.600 3244.100/.110/.600 3245.508/.518
3239.100/.110/.600 3243.108/.118
3237.108/.118 3244.108/.118 Detalles,
3238.108/.118 ver pág. 19
3239.108/.118

M M M
1~ 3~ 24 V DC

L N PE L1 L2 L3 PE – 24 +
3240.100/.110/.600 3244.140 3237.124
3241.100/.110/.600 3238.124
3240.108/.118 3239.124
3241.108/.118 3240.124
3241.124

Imagen 11: Esquemas de conexión

18 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

 13 EsqueIas de cKJexiÔJ
¡Sólo para 3245!
ES
1 2
Interfaz Ventilador/motor
3 2
L AC 1 P
CON10
N 1.6 AT AC 2 N
1 – 10 V
CON11
2 1
10 V n = max. PE
1V n = min. CON12
PE 1
<1 V n=0

+10 V 1 3
3
3 4 I max. = 1.1 mA 2 4

15 V 10 V/PWM
2
47 k 47 k 1 uF
3
I max. = 10 mA GND
1
2 2
10 K
Speed 3 1
4
12 V
680 R 4 2
1 1
ZMM 47
100 % PWM n = max.
10 % PWM n = min.
<10 % PWM n=0

Imagen 12: Esquema de conexión 3245

1 Velocidad máx.
(corresponde al estado de entrega)
2 Velocidad ajustable
3 Velocidad ajustable mediante
PWM 1 – 10 kHz
4 Velocidad ajustable mediante
pontenciómetro

+ÙI CKJexiÔJ FuJciÔJTarea

CON10 L Fuente de alimentación 200…240 V AC, 50…60 Hz
CON11 N Conductor neutro
CON12 PE Puesta a tierra
1 GND Conexión GND de la interfaz de control
2 0…10 V/PWM Entrada de control 0…10 V o PWM, aislada galvánicamente, impedancia 100 k1
3 +10 V Tensión de salida 10 V max. 1,1 mA, aislada galvánicamente,
no protegido contra cortocircuitos
4 Speed Velocidad de salida Open Collector, 1 pulso por revolución, aislado galvánicamente

Tab. 8: Leyendas imagen 12

Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal 19

 14 Declaración de conformidad CE
14 DecHaraciÔJ de cKJfKrIidad CE
ES

20 Instrucciones de montaje y funcionamiento para ventilador con filtro de Rittal

䡲 Enclosures
䡲 Power Distribution
䡲 Climate Control
䡲 IT Infrastructure
䡲 Software & Services

7a edición 10/2020 / N° ID 328 628 / N° de dibujo A 4474200SK23

RITTAL GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach 1662 䡠 D-35726 Herborn
Phone +49(0)2772 505-0 䡠 Fax +49(0)2772 505-2319
E-mail: [email protected] 䡠 www.rittal.com
Data sheet 6AV2123-2GB03-0AX0

SIMATIC HMI, KTP700 Basic, Basic Panel, Key/touch operation, 7" TFT
display, 65536 colors, PROFINET interface, configurable from WinCC
Basic V13/ STEP 7 Basic V13, contains open-source software, which is
provided free of charge see enclosed CD

General information
Product type designation KTP700 Basic color PN
Display
Design of display TFT widescreen display, LED backlighting
Screen diagonal 7 in
Display width 154.1 mm
Display height 85.9 mm
Number of colors 65 536
Resolution (pixels)
● Horizontal image resolution 800 pixel
● Vertical image resolution 480 pixel
Backlighting
● MTBF backlighting (at 25 °C) 20 000 h
● Backlight dimmable Yes
Control elements
Keyboard fonts
● Function keys
— Number of function keys 8
— Number of function keys with LEDs 0
● Keys with LED No
● System keys No
● Numeric keyboard Yes; Onscreen keyboard
● alphanumeric keyboard Yes; Onscreen keyboard
Touch operation
● Design as touch screen Yes; Analog-resistive
Installation type/mounting
Mounting position vertical
Wall mounting/direct mounting No
Mounting in portrait format possible Yes
Mounting in landscape format possible Yes
maximum permissible angle of inclination without external 35°
ventilation
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
permissible range, lower limit (DC) 19.2 V
permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 230 mA

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 1/6 © Copyright Siemens
 Starting current inrush I²t 0.2 A²·s
Power
Active power input, typ. 5.5 W
Processor
Processor type ARM
Memory
Flash Yes
RAM Yes
Memory available for user data 10 Mbyte
Type of output
Acoustics
● Buzzer Yes
● Speaker No
Time of day
Clock
● Hardware clock (real-time) Yes
● Software clock Yes
● retentive Yes; Back-up duration typically 6 weeks
● synchronizable Yes
Interfaces
Number of industrial Ethernet interfaces 1
Number of RS 485 interfaces 0
Number of RS 422 interfaces 0
Number of RS 232 interfaces 0
Number of USB interfaces 1; Up to 16 GB
Number of 20 mA interfaces (TTY) 0
Number of parallel interfaces 0
Number of other interfaces 0
Number of SD card slots 0
With software interfaces No
Industrial Ethernet
● Industrial Ethernet status LED 2
Protocols
PROFINET Yes
Supports protocol for PROFINET IO No
IRT No
PROFIBUS No
EtherNet/IP Yes
MPI No
Protocols (Ethernet)
● TCP/IP Yes
● DHCP Yes
● SNMP Yes
● DCP Yes
● LLDP Yes
WEB characteristics
● HTTP No
● HTML No
Redundancy mode
Media redundancy
— MRP No
Further protocols
● CAN No
● MODBUS Yes; Modicon (MODBUS TCP/IP)
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnoses
● Diagnostic information readable No
EMC
Emission of radio interference acc. to EN 55 011

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 2/6 © Copyright Siemens
 ● Limit class A, for use in industrial areas Yes
● Limit class B, for use in residential areas No
Degree and class of protection
IP (at the front) IP65
IP (rear) IP20
NEMA (front)
● Enclosure Type 4 at the front Yes
● Enclosure Type 4x at the front Yes
Standards, approvals, certificates
CE mark Yes
cULus Yes
RCM (formerly C-TICK) Yes
KC approval Yes
Use in hazardous areas
● ATEX Zone 2 No
● ATEX Zone 22 No
● IECEx Zone 2 No
● IECEx Zone 22 No
● cULus Class I Zone 1 No
● cULus Class I Zone 2, Division 2 No
● FM Class I Division 2 No
Marine approval
● Germanischer Lloyd (GL) Yes
● American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Yes
● Bureau Veritas (BV) Yes
● Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Yes
● Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS) Yes
● Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (Class NK) Yes
● Polski Rejestr Statkow (PRS) No
● Chinese Classification Society (CCS) No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Operation (vertical installation)
— For vertical installation, min. 0 °C
— For vertical installation, max. 50 °C
Operation (max. tilt angle)
— At maximum tilt angle, min. 0 °C
— At maximum tilt angle, min. 40 °C
Operation (vertical installation, portrait format)
— For vertical installation, min. 0 °C
— For vertical installation, max. 40 °C
Operation (max. tilt angle, portrait format)
— At maximum tilt angle, min. 0 °C
— At maximum tilt angle, min. 35 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transportation
● min. -20 °C
● max. 60 °C
Relative humidity
● Operation, max. 90 %; no condensation
Operating systems
proprietary Yes
pre-installed operating system
● Windows CE No
configuration / header
Message indicator Yes
Alarm system (incl. buffer and acknowledgment) Yes
Process value display (output) Yes
Process value default (input) possible Yes
Recipe management Yes

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 3/6 © Copyright Siemens
 Configuration software
● STEP 7 Basic (TIA Portal) Yes; via integrated WinCC Basic (TIA Portal)
● STEP 7 Professional (TIA Portal) Yes; via integrated WinCC Basic (TIA Portal)
● WinCC flexible Compact No
● WinCC flexible Standard No
● WinCC flexible Advanced No
● WinCC Basic (TIA Portal) Yes
● WinCC Comfort (TIA Portal) Yes
● WinCC Advanced (TIA Portal) Yes
● WinCC Professional (TIA Portal) Yes
Languages
Online languages
● Number of online/runtime languages 10
Project languages
● Languages per project 32
Functionality under WinCC (TIA Portal)
Libraries Yes
Applications/options
● Web browser Yes
● SIMATIC WinCC Sm@rtServer Yes; Available with WinCC (TIA Portal) V14 or higher
Number of Visual Basic Scripts No
Task planner Yes
● time-controlled No
● task-controlled Yes
Help system Yes
● Number of characters per info text 500
Message system
● Number of alarm classes 32
● Bit messages
— Number of bit messages 1 000
● Analog messages
— Number of analog messages 25
● S7 alarm number procedure No
● System messages HMI Yes
● System event, more (SIMATIC S7, SINUMERIK, Yes; System message buffer of the SIMATIC S7-1200 and S7-1500
SIMOTION, ... )
● Number of characters per message 80
● Number of process values per message 8
● Acknowledgment groups Yes
● Message indicator Yes
● Message buffer
— Number of entries 256
— Circulating buffer Yes
— retentive Yes
— maintenance-free Yes
Recipe management
● Number of recipes 50
● Data records per recipe 100
● Entries per data record 100
● Size of internal recipe memory 256 kbyte
● Recipe memory expandable No
Variables
● Number of variables per device 800
● Number of variables per screen 100
● Limit values Yes
● Multiplexing Yes
● Structures No
● Arrays Yes
Images
● Number of configurable images 250

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 4/6 © Copyright Siemens
 ● Permanent window/default Yes
● Global image Yes
● Pop-up images No
● Slide-in images No
● Image selection by PLC Yes
● Image number in the PLC Yes
Image objects
● Number of objects per image 100
● Text fields Yes
● I/O fields Yes
● Graphic I/O fields (graphics list) Yes
● Symbolic I/O fields (text list) Yes
● Date/time fields Yes
● Switches Yes
● Buttons Yes
● Graphic display Yes
● Icons Yes
● Geometric objects Yes
Complex image objects
● Number of complex objects per screen 10
● Alarm view Yes
● Trend view Yes
● User view Yes
● Status/control No
● Sm@rtClient view No
● Recipe view Yes
● f(x) trend view No
● System diagnostics view Yes; System message buffer of the SIMATIC S7-1200 and S7-1500
● Media Player No
● HTML browser Yes
● PDF display No
● IP camera display No
● Bar graphs Yes
● Sliders No
● Pointer instruments No
● Analog/digital clock No
Lists
● Number of text lists per project 300
● Number of entries per text list 100
● Number of graphics lists per project 100
● Number of entries per graphics list 100
Archiving
● Number of archives per device 2; One message and one process value archive
● Number of entries per archive 10 000
● Message archive Yes
● Process value archive Yes
● Archiving methods
— Sequential archive Yes
— Short-term archive Yes
● Memory location
— Memory card No
— USB memory Yes
— Ethernet No
● Data storage format
— CSV No
— TXT Yes
— RDB No
Security
● Number of user groups 50
● Number of user rights 32

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 5/6 © Copyright Siemens
 ● Number of users 50
● Password export/import Yes
● SIMATIC Logon No
Character sets
● Keyboard fonts
— US English Yes
Transfer (upload/download)
● MPI/PROFIBUS DP No
● USB No
● Ethernet Yes
● using external storage medium Yes
Process coupling
● S7-1200 Yes
● S7-1500 Yes
● S7-200 Yes
● S7-300/400 Yes
● LOGO! Yes
● WinAC Yes
● SINUMERIK Yes; No access to NCK data
● SIMOTION Yes
● Allen Bradley (EtherNet/IP) Yes
● Allen Bradley (DF1) No
● Mitsubishi (MC TCP/IP) Yes
● Mitsubishi (FX) No
● OMRON (FINS TCP) No
● OMRON (LINK/Multilink) No
● Modicon (Modbus TCP/IP) Yes
● Modicon (Modbus) No
Service tools/configuration aids
● Backup/Restore manually Yes
● Backup/Restore automatically No
● Simulation Yes
● Device switchover Yes
Peripherals/Options
Printer No
SIMATIC HMI MM memory card: Multi Media Card No
SIMATIC HMI SD memory card: Secure Digital memory No
card
SIMATIC HMI CF memory card Compact Flash Card No
USB memory Yes
SIMATIC IPC USB Flashdrive (USB stick) Yes
SIMATIC HMI USB stick Yes
Mechanics/material
Enclosure material (front)
● Plastic Yes
● Aluminum No
● Stainless steel No
Dimensions
Width of the housing front 214 mm
Height of housing front 158 mm
Mounting cutout, width 197 mm
Mounting cutout, height 141 mm
Overall depth 39 mm
Weights
Weight (without packaging) 780 g
Weight (with packaging) 990 g

last modified: 10/8/2021

6AV21232GB030AX0 Subject to change without notice

1/11/2022
Page 6/6 © Copyright Siemens
Ficha técnica del producto
Especificaciones

variable speed drive ATV310, 1.5

kW, 2 hp, 380...460 V, 3 phase,
without filter

Descargo de responsabilidad: Esta documentación no ha sido diseñada como reemplazo, ni se debe utilizar para determinar la idoneidad o la confiabilidad de estos productos para aplicaciones específicas de usuarios
ATV310HU15N4E

Principal
Gama de producto Easy Altivar 310L

Tipo de producto o componente Variador de velocidad

Aplicación específica de Máquina simple

producto

Estilo de conjunto Con disipación de calor

Nombre corto del dispositivo ATV310

Número de fases de la red Trifásica

[Us] tensión de alimentación 380...480 V - 15...10 %

asignada

Potencia del motor en kW 1.5 kW

Potencia del motor en HP 2 hp

Nivel de ruido 50 dB

Opcionales
Destino del produc Motores asíncronos

Cantidad por juego Juego de 1

Filtro CEM Sin filtro CEM

Tipo de refrigeración Ventilador integrado

Frecuencia de alimentación 50/60 Hz +/- 5 %

Protocolo del puerto de Modbus

comunicación

Tipo de conector RJ45 en cara frontal Modbus

Interfaz física RS 485 de dos hilos Modbus

Marco de transmisión RTU Modbus

Velocidad de transmisión 4800 bit/s

9600 bit/s
19200 bit/s
38400 bit/s

Número de direcciones 1…247 Modbus

Servicio de comunicación Registros con lectura (03) 29 palabras

Regis, únic, escr, (06) 29 palabras
Reg, múlt, lect,/escr, (16) 27 palabras
Registradores múltiples de lectura/escritura (23) 4/4 palabras
Identificación de dispositivo de lectura (43)

12/01/2022 1
Corriente de línea 5.4 A
54.1 A

Potencia aparente 4.3 kVA

35.7 kVA

Corriente de cortocircuito de la 5 kA
red 5 kA

Corriente de salida en continuo 4.1 A 4 kHz

43 A 4 kHz

Máxima corriente transitoria 6.2 A 60 s

47.3 A 60 s

Potencia disipada en W 51.82 W en In

588 W en In

Rango de frecuencias de salida 0.5…400 Hz

Frecuencia de conmutación 4 kHz

nominal

Frecuencia de conmutación 2...12 kHz regulable

Rango de velocidades 1…20

Sobrepar transitorio 170…200 % del par nominal del motor según el calibre del variador y el tipo de motor

Par de frenado Up to 150 % of nominal motor torque con resistor de freno con gran inercia
Hasta 70% del par motor nominal sin resistencia de frenado

Perfil de control de motor Índice de ahorro de energía

asíncrono Índice de ahorro de energía
Control vector flujo sin detector

Compensación desliz, motor Regulable

Regulable

Tensión de salida 380...460 V trifásica

Consecutivo, seguido, continuo, Terminal 1,5...2,5 mm² L1, L2, L3, PA/+, PB, U, V, W
adosado

Par de apriete 0.8…1 N.m

Aislamiento Eléctrico entre alimentación y control

Suministro Fuente de alimentación interna para potenciómetro de referencia 5 V 4.75…5.25 V CC 10 mA

protección de sobrecarga y cortocircuito
Alimentación interna para entradas lógicas 24 V 20.4…28.8 V CC 100 mA protección de sobrecarga y
cortocircuito

Número de entrada analógica 1

Tipo de entrada analógica Corriente configurable AI1 0...20 mA 250 Ohm

Tensión configurable AI1 0...10 V 30 kOhm
Tensión configurable AI1 0...5 V 30 kOhm

Número de entrada digital 4

Entrada discreta Programable LI1...LI4 24 V 18...30 V

Entrada lógica Lógica negativa (fregadero) > 16 V < 10 V 3,5 kOhm

Lógica positiva (fuente) 0...< 5 V > 11 V

Duración de muestreo 10 ms entrada analógica

20 ms +/- 1 ms entrad lóg,

Error líneal +/- 0,3 % de máximo valor entrada analógica

Número de salida analógica 1

Tipo de salida analógica AO1 tensión configurable por software 0...10 V 470 Ohm 8 bits
AO1 corriente configurable por software 0...20 mA 800 Ohm 8 bits

Número de salida digital 2

Salida discreta Salida lógica LO+, LO-

Salida relé protegida R1A, R1B, R1C 1 C/O

Corriente mínima de 5 mA 24 V CC relé lógico

conmutación

Intensidad de conmutación 2 A 250 V CA inductivo 0.4 L/R = 7 ms relé lógico

máxima 2 A 30 V CC inductivo 0.4 L/R = 7 ms relé lógico
3 A 250 V CA resistivo 1 L/R = 0 ms relé lógico

2
12/01/2022
 4 A 30 V CC resistivo 1 L/R = 0 ms relé lógico

Rampas de aceleración y U
deceleración S
Linear from 0...999.9 s

De desconexión a parada Mediante inyección de CC 30 s

Tipo de protección Sobretensión en la línea de alimentación

Subtensión de la línea de alimentación
Sobreintensidad entre fases de salida y tierra
Protección contra sobrecalentamiento
Cortocircuito entre fases del motor
Contra pérdida de fase de entrada trifásica
Proteción térmica del varaidor porcalculo continui del I²t

Resolución de frecuencia Entrada analóg, convertido A/D, 10 bits

Unidad visualización 0,1 Hz

Constante de tiempo 20 ms +/- 1 ms para cambio de referencia

Posición de funcionamiento Vertical +/- 10 grados

Altura 151 mm

Anchura 105 mm

Profundidad 143 mm

Peso del producto 1.1 kg

Ambiente
Compatibilidad Prueba de inmunidad oscilatoria/ráfagas eléctrica nivel_4 EN/IEC 61000-4-4
electromagnética Prueba de inmunidad ante descarga electroestática nivel_3 EN/IEC 61000-4-2
Inmunidad a perturbaciones conducidas nivel_3 EN/IEC 61000-4-6
Prueba de inmunidad de la radiofrecuencia radiada del campo electromagnético nivel_3 EN/IEC
61000-4-3
Prueba de inmunidad de huecos y caídas de tensión EN/IEC 61000-4-11
Prueba de inmunidad frente a sobretensión nivel_3 EN/IEC 61000-4-5

Normas EN/IEC 61800-5-1

EN/IEC 61800-3

Grado de protección IP IP20 sin placa de obturación en pieza superior

IP41 superior

Grado de contaminación 2 EN/IEC 61800-5-1

Características ambientales Resistente en ambientes con polvo clase 3S2 EN/IEC 60721-3-3
Resistente en ambientes químicos clase 3C3 EN/IEC 60721-3-3

Resistencia a los choques 25 gn 11 ms EN/IEC 60068-2-27

Humedad relativa 5…95 % sin condensación IEC 60068-2-3

5…95 % sin goteo de agua IEC 60068-2-3

Temperatura ambiente de -25…70 °C

almacenamiento

Temperatura ambiente de -10…55 °C sin reducción de la potencia nominal

funcionamiento 55…60 °C cubierta protectora de la parte superior del motor extraída con disminución de corriente
de 2,2 % por grada

Altitud máxima de <= 1000 m sin

funcionamiento

Unidades emabalaje
Tipo de Unidad de Paquete 1 PCE

Número de Unidades en el 1
Paquete 1

Paquete 1 Peso 1.381 kg

Paquete 1 Altura 16 cm

Paquete 1 ancho 19.5 cm

Paquete 1 Largo 17.5 cm

12/01/2022 3